-----BEGIN PRIVACY-ENHANCED MESSAGE----- Proc-Type: 2001,MIC-CLEAR Originator-Name: webmaster@www.sec.gov Originator-Key-Asymmetric: MFgwCgYEVQgBAQICAf8DSgAwRwJAW2sNKK9AVtBzYZmr6aGjlWyK3XmZv3dTINen TWSM7vrzLADbmYQaionwg5sDW3P6oaM5D3tdezXMm7z1T+B+twIDAQAB MIC-Info: RSA-MD5,RSA, Mgf9s+VkbScU6SPGrhMK3jdsFFe9SAk3bx+4wnkkWGxYV9ycJh1lOi3L0Hq+2/TL 8KS1NJrLpX0QHjA9XWv78w== 0000950159-05-001271.txt : 20051108 0000950159-05-001271.hdr.sgml : 20051108 20051108110506 ACCESSION NUMBER: 0000950159-05-001271 CONFORMED SUBMISSION TYPE: 10-Q PUBLIC DOCUMENT COUNT: 12 CONFORMED PERIOD OF REPORT: 20050930 FILED AS OF DATE: 20051108 DATE AS OF CHANGE: 20051108 FILER: COMPANY DATA: COMPANY CONFORMED NAME: PMA CAPITAL CORP CENTRAL INDEX KEY: 0001041665 STANDARD INDUSTRIAL CLASSIFICATION: FIRE, MARINE & CASUALTY INSURANCE [6331] IRS NUMBER: 232217932 STATE OF INCORPORATION: PA FISCAL YEAR END: 1231 FILING VALUES: FORM TYPE: 10-Q SEC ACT: 1934 Act SEC FILE NUMBER: 001-31706 FILM NUMBER: 051185181 BUSINESS ADDRESS: STREET 1: 380 SENTRY PARKWAY CITY: BLUE BELL STATE: PA ZIP: 19422 BUSINESS PHONE: 2156655046 MAIL ADDRESS: STREET 1: 380 SENTRY PARKWAY CITY: BLUE BELL STATE: PA ZIP: 19422 FORMER COMPANY: FORMER CONFORMED NAME: PENNSYLVANIA MANUFACTURERS CORP DATE OF NAME CHANGE: 19970702 10-Q 1 pma10q.htm PMA 3RD QTR 10Q PMA 3rd Qtr 10Q

UNITED STATES
SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
Washington, D. C. 20549
 
FORM 10-Q
(MARK ONE)
/X/
QUARTERLY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
   
FOR THE QUARTERLY PERIOD ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 2005
   
OR
   
/  /
TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

FOR THE TRANSITION PERIOD FROM __________ TO __________
  

Commission File Number 000-22761

PMA Capital Corporation
(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

Pennsylvania
 
23-2217932
(State or other jurisdiction of
 
(IRS Employer
incorporation or organization)
 
Identification No.)


380 Sentry Parkway
   
Blue Bell, Pennsylvania
 
19422-2357
(Address of principal executive offices)
 
(Zip Code)

(215) 665-5046
(Registrant's telephone number, including area code)

Not applicable
(Former name, former address and former fiscal year, if changed since last report)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days. YES /X/ NO / /

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is an accelerated filer (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act). YES /X/ NO / /

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act). YES / / NO /X/

There were 31,956,983 shares outstanding of the registrant’s Class A Common Stock, $5 par value per share, as of the close of business on October 28, 2005.



INDEX
     
     
   
Page
     
 
     
 
     
   
 
     
   
 
     
   
 
     
   
 
     
 
     
 
 
     
     
     
 
     
     
     
     
     


Part I. Financial Information
Item 1. Financial Statements
PMA Capital Corporation
Condensed Consolidated Balance Sheets
(Unaudited)



       
 As of
 
As of
 
 
 
 
 
 September 30,
 
December 31,
 
(in thousands, except share data)
 
 
 
 2005
 
2004
 
                
Assets:
              
Investments:
              
   Fixed maturities available for sale, at fair value  
 
          
(amortized cost: 2005 - $1,182,610; 2004 - $1,283,256)
     
$
1,184,301
 
$
1,304,086
 
Short-term investments
         
67,636
   
123,746
 
Short-term investments, loaned securities collateral
         
63,751
   
-
 
Total investments
         
1,315,688
   
1,427,832
 
                     
Cash
         
43,282
   
35,537
 
Accrued investment income
         
13,703
   
15,517
 
Premiums receivable (net of valuation allowance:
                   
2005 - $8,938; 2004 - $9,349)
         
212,847
   
197,831
 
Reinsurance receivables (net of valuation allowance: 2005 - $9,402; 2004 - $9,002)
         
1,115,953
   
1,142,552
 
Deferred income taxes, net
         
98,568
   
86,501
 
Deferred acquisition costs
         
39,432
   
31,426
 
Funds held by reinsureds
         
153,064
   
142,064
 
Other assets
         
167,192
   
171,042
 
Total assets
       
$
3,159,729
 
$
3,250,302
 
                     
Liabilities:
                   
Unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
       
$
1,966,907
 
$
2,111,598
 
Unearned premiums
         
199,153
   
158,489
 
Long-term debt
         
216,808
   
210,784
 
Accounts payable, accrued expenses and other liabilities
         
198,441
   
196,744
 
Funds held under reinsurance treaties
         
96,067
   
121,234
 
Dividends to policyholders
         
3,931
   
5,977
 
Payable under securities loan agreements
         
63,758
   
25
 
Total liabilities
         
2,745,065
   
2,804,851
 
                     
Commitments and contingencies (Note 6)
                   
                     
Shareholders' Equity:
                   
Class A Common stock, $5 par value
                   
(2005 - 60,000,000 shares authorized; 34,217,945 shares issued and 31,956,983 outstanding;
                   
2004 - 60,000,000 shares authorized; 34,217,945 shares issued and 31,676,851 outstanding)
         
171,090
   
171,090
 
Additional paid-in capital
         
109,331
   
109,331
 
Retained earnings
         
188,834
   
213,313
 
Accumulated other comprehensive loss
         
(14,861
)
 
(1,959
)
Treasury stock, at cost (2005 - 2,260,962 shares; 2004 - 2,541,094 shares)
         
(39,305
)
 
(45,573
)
Unearned restricted stock compensation
         
(425
)
 
(751
)
Total shareholders' equity
         
414,664
   
445,451
 
Total liabilities and shareholders' equity
       
$
3,159,729
 
$
3,250,302
 
                     
                     
 
 
 


See accompanying notes to the unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 
1


PMA Capital Corporation
Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations
(Unaudited)
 

 

   
 Three Months Ended   
 
 Nine Months Ended   
 
   
 September 30,   
 
 September 30,   
 
(in thousands, except per share data)
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
                       
Revenues:
                     
Net premiums written
 
$
117,471
 
$
83,567
 
$
311,067
 
$
244,938
 
Change in net unearned premiums
   
(25,248
)
 
20,643
   
(42,401
)
 
183,889
 
Net premiums earned
   
92,223
   
104,210
   
268,666
   
428,827
 
Net investment income
   
12,648
   
13,238
   
36,902
   
44,803
 
Net realized investment gains
   
483
   
3,515
   
3,201
   
14,363
 
Other revenues
   
6,209
   
5,881
   
17,340
   
18,576
 
Total revenues
   
111,563
   
126,844
   
326,109
   
506,569
 
 
                         
Losses and expenses:
                         
Losses and loss adjustment expenses
   
68,112
   
80,706
   
225,361
   
310,367
 
Acquisition expenses
   
19,691
   
24,087
   
56,345
   
96,290
 
Operating expenses
   
17,872
   
18,318
   
54,372
   
68,937
 
Dividends to policyholders
   
567
   
805
   
2,831
   
3,180
 
Interest expense
   
4,105
   
2,973
   
12,114
   
8,872
 
Total losses and expenses
   
110,347
   
126,889
   
351,023
   
487,646
 
                           
Income (loss) before income taxes
   
1,216
   
(45
)
 
(24,914
)
 
18,923
 
                           
Income tax expense (benefit):
                         
Current
   
-
   
(117
)
 
-
   
272
 
Deferred
   
476
   
146
   
(5,120
)
 
6,508
 
Total
   
476
   
29
   
(5,120
)
 
6,780
 
Net income (loss)
 
$
740
 
$
(74
)
$
(19,794
)
$
12,143
 
                           
Net income (loss) per share:
                         
Basic
 
$
0.02
 
$
0.00
 
$
(0.63
)
$
0.39
 
Diluted
 
$
0.02
 
$
0.00
 
$
(0.63
)
$
0.38
 
                           
                           
 
 
 

See accompanying notes to the unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 
2

 
PMA Capital Corporation
Condensed Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows
(Unaudited)


   
 Nine Months Ended   
 
   
 September 30,   
 
(in thousands)
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
             
Cash flows from operating activities:
           
Net income (loss)
 
$
(19,794
)
$
12,143
 
Adjustments to reconcile net income (loss) to net cash flows
             
used in operating activities:
             
Deferred income tax expense
   
(5,120
)
 
6,508
 
Net realized investment gains
   
(3,201
)
 
(14,363
)
Depreciation and amortization
   
11,672
   
15,400
 
Change in:
             
Premiums receivable and unearned premiums, net
   
25,648
   
(65,473
)
Reinsurance receivables
   
26,599
   
50,316
 
Unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses
   
(144,691
)
 
(361,418
)
Funds held by reinsureds
   
(11,000
)
 
12,855
 
Funds held under reinsurance treaties
   
(25,167
)
 
(158,004
)
Deferred acquisition costs
   
(8,006
)
 
46,175
 
Accounts payable, accrued expenses and other liabilities
   
10,660
   
(54,947
)
Dividends to policyholders
   
(2,046
)
 
(2,055
)
Accrued investment income
   
1,814
   
4,463
 
Other, net
   
(4,463
)
 
(6,206
)
Net cash flows used in operating activities
   
(147,095
)
 
(514,606
)
               
Cash flows from investing activities:
             
Fixed maturities available for sale:
             
Purchases
   
(251,978
)
 
(393,172
)
Maturities or calls
   
119,111
   
168,049
 
Sales
   
223,289
   
677,665
 
Net sales of short-term investments
   
55,703
   
48,172
 
Proceeds from sale of other assets sold
   
-
   
31,818
 
Other, net
   
(1,978
)
 
1,098
 
Net cash flows provided by investing activities
   
144,147
   
533,630
 
               
Cash flows from financing activities:
             
Proceeds from debt issuance
   
10,000
   
-
 
Repurchases of debt
   
(270
)
 
-
 
Debt issue costs
   
(256
)
 
-
 
Proceeds from exercise of stock options
   
1,219
   
-
 
Net repayments of notes receivable from officers
   
-
   
59
 
Net cash flows provided by financing activities
   
10,693
   
59
 
               
Net increase in cash
   
7,745
   
19,083
 
Cash - beginning of period
   
35,537
   
28,963
 
Cash - end of period
 
$
43,282
 
$
48,046
 
               
Supplementary cash flow information:
             
Income taxes refunded
 
$
-
 
$
(2,592
)
Interest paid
 
$
11,701
 
$
9,236
 
               
 
 
 


See accompanying notes to the unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 
3


PMA Capital Corporation
Condensed Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income (Loss)
(Unaudited)
 

 

   
 Three Months Ended   
 
 Nine Months Ended   
 
   
 September 30,   
 
 September 30,   
 
(in thousands)
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
                       
Net income (loss)
 
$
740
 
$
(74
)
$
(19,794
)
$
12,143
 
                           
Other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax:
                         
Unrealized gains (losses) on securities:
                         
Holding gains (losses) arising during the period
   
(15,800
)
 
17,603
   
(10,389
)
 
(6,697
)
Less: reclassification adjustment for gains
                         
included in net income (loss), net  
                         
of tax expense: $169 and $1,230 for three 
                         
months ended September 30, 2005 and 2004; 
                         
$1,120 and $5,027 for nine months ended  
                         
September 30, 2005 and 2004 
   
(314
)
 
(2,285
)
 
(2,081
)
 
(9,336
)
                           
Total unrealized gain (loss) on securities
   
(16,114
)
 
15,318
   
(12,470
)
 
(16,033
)
Foreign currency translation loss, net of tax
                         
benefit: $66 and $685 for three months ended
                         
September 30, 2005 and 2004; $232 and $1,456 for nine
                         
months ended September 30, 2005 and 2004
   
(124
)
 
(1,273
)
 
(432
)
 
(2,704
)
                           
Other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax
   
(16,238
)
 
14,045
   
(12,902
)
 
(18,737
)
                           
Comprehensive income (loss)
 
$
(15,498
)
$
13,971
 
$
(32,696
)
$
(6,594
)
                           
                           
                           
 



See accompanying notes to the unaudited condensed consolidated financial statements.

 
4



PMA Capital Corporation
Notes to the Unaudited Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements


1. BUSINESS DESCRIPTION

The accompanying condensed consolidated financial statements include the accounts of PMA Capital Corporation and its subsidiaries (collectively referred to as “PMA Capital” or the “Company”). PMA Capital is an insurance holding company that owns and operates specialty risk management businesses:

The PMA Insurance Group — The PMA Insurance Group writes workers’ compensation, integrated disability and, to a lesser extent, other standard lines of commercial insurance, primarily in the eastern part of the United States. Approximately 85% of The PMA Insurance Group’s business is produced through independent agents and brokers.

Run-off Operations— Run-off Operations consists of the results of the Company’s former reinsurance and excess and surplus lines businesses. The Company’s former reinsurance operations offered excess of loss and pro rata property and casualty reinsurance protection. In November 2003, the Company decided to withdraw from the reinsurance business. In May 2002, the Company withdrew from its former excess and surplus lines business.

2.
SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

A. Basis of Presentation - The condensed consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“GAAP”) for interim financial information and with the instructions to Form 10-Q and Article 10 of Regulation S-X. It is management’s opinion that all adjustments, consisting of normal recurring adjustments, considered necessary for a fair presentation have been included. Certain reclassifications of prior year amounts have been made to conform to the 2005 presentation. Prior period amounts related to expense reimbursements for certain managed care services were reclassified from Operating expenses to Other revenues on the Condensed Consolidated Statements of Operations to conform to the current year presentation.  The reclassification had no impact on net income (loss) in any period.

The preparation of consolidated financial statements in conformity with GAAP requires management to make certain estimates and assumptions that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities, disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amounts of revenues and expenses during the period. Due to this and certain other factors, such as the seasonal nature of portions of the insurance business and the decision to withdraw from the reinsurance business, as well as competitive and other market conditions, operating results for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005 are not necessarily indicative of the results to be expected for the full year.

The information included in this Form 10-Q should be read in conjunction with the Company’s audited consolidated financial statements and footnotes included in its 2004 Annual Report on Form 10-K.

B. Stock-Based Compensation - The Company accounts for stock-based compensation using the intrinsic value method. Accordingly, compensation cost for stock options is measured as the excess, if any, of the quoted market price of the Company’s Class A Common stock at grant date or other measurement date over the amount an employee must pay to acquire the Class A Common stock.

5


The following table illustrates the effect on net income (loss) if the fair value based method had been applied:


   
Three Months Ended  
 
Nine Months Ended  
 
 
 
September 30,  
 
September 30,  
 
(in thousands, except per share)
 
2005
 
2004
 
2005
 
2004
 
                   
Net income (loss)
 
$
740
 
$
(74
)
$
(19,794
)
$
12,143
 
Stock-based compensation expense already included in reported
                         
net income (loss), net of tax
   
103
   
174
   
464
   
534
 
Total stock-based compensation expense determined under fair
                         
value based method, net of tax
   
(429
)
 
(347
)
 
(1,554
)
 
(1,163
)
Pro forma net income (loss)
 
$
414
 
$
(247
)
$
(20,884
)
$
11,514
 
                           
Net income (loss) per share:
                         
Basic - as reported
 
$
0.02
 
$
-
 
$
(0.63
)
$
0.39
 
Basic - pro forma
 
$
0.01
 
$
(0.01
)
$
(0.66
)
$
0.37
 
                           
Diluted - as reported
 
$
0.02
 
$
-
 
$
(0.63
)
$
0.38
 
Diluted - pro forma
 
$
0.01
 
$
(0.01
)
$
(0.66
)
$
0.36
 
                           
`
                         
                           

C. Recent Accounting Pronouncements - In March 2004, the Emerging Issues Task Force (“EITF”) reached a consensus regarding EITF 03-1, “The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its Application to Certain Investments.” The consensus provides guidance for evaluating whether an investment is other-than-temporarily impaired. The Company has applied the disclosure provisions of EITF 03-1 to its consolidated financial statements. In September 2004, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued Staff Position (“FSP”) EITF 03-1-1, which delayed the effective date of the application of the recognition and measurement provisions of EITF 03-1. In the third quarter of 2005, the FASB decided not to provide additional guidance on the meaning of other-than-temporary impairment and directed its staff to finalize proposed FASB Staff Position (FSP) EITF 03-1-a, “Implementation Guidance for the Application of Paragraph 16 of EITF Issue No. 03-1.” The final FSP, retitled as FSP FAS 115-1, “The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its Application to Certain Investments” will be finalized in the fourth quarter of 2005 and will be subject to adoption for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2005. The Company does not believe that the adoption of this guidance will have a material impact on its financial condition or results of operations.

In December 2004, the FASB revised Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 123, “Share-Based Payment,” to require the recognition of expenses relating to share-based payment transactions, including employee stock options, based on the fair value of the equity instruments issued. The Company is required to adopt the revised SFAS No. 123 in the first quarter of 2006. Effective with the first quarter of 2006, the Company will recognize an expense over the required service period for any stock options granted, modified, cancelled, or repurchased after that date and for the portion of grants for which the requisite service has not yet been rendered, based on the grant-date fair value of those awards. See Note 2-B for the effect on net income (loss) if the fair value based method had been applied.

3.
UNPAID LOSSES AND LOSS ADJUSTMENT EXPENSES

At September 30, 2005, the Company estimated that its liability for unpaid losses and loss adjustment expenses (“LAE”) for all insurance policies and reinsurance contracts issued by its insurance businesses is $1,966.9 million. This amount includes estimated losses from claims plus estimated expenses to settle claims. This estimate includes amounts for losses occurring on or prior to September 30, 2005 whether or not these claims have been reported to the Company.

Unpaid losses and LAE reflect management’s best estimate of future amounts needed to pay claims and related settlement costs with respect to insured events which have occurred, including events that have not been reported to the Company. Due to the “long-tail” nature of a significant portion of the Company’s business, in many cases significant periods of time, ranging up to several years or more, may elapse between the occurrence of an insured loss, the reporting of the loss to the Company and the Company’s payment of that loss. The Company defines long-tail business as those lines of business in which a majority of coverage involves average loss payment lags of several years beyond the expiration of the policy. The Company’s major long-tail lines include its workers’ compensation and casualty reinsurance business. In addition,
 

6

 
 
because reinsurers rely on their ceding companies to provide them with information regarding incurred losses, reported claims for reinsurers become known more slowly than for primary insurers and are subject to more unforeseen development and uncertainty. As part of the process for determining the Company’s unpaid losses and LAE, various actuarial models are used that analyze historical data and consider the impact of current developments and trends, such as trends in claims severity and frequency and claims settlement trends. Also considered are legal developments, regulatory trends, legislative developments, changes in social attitudes and economic conditions.
 
During the first quarter of 2005, the Run-off Operations increased its loss and LAE reserves for prior accident years by $30 million. Each quarter, company actuaries conduct their quarterly reserve review, which includes analyzing recent trends in the levels of the reported and paid claims to determine the impact of any emerging data on loss development trends and recorded unpaid losses and LAE reserves. In the first quarter of 2005, company actuaries identified higher than expected claim frequency and severity on policies covering contractors’ liability for construction defects from accident years 1998 to 2001 written by the Company’s former excess and surplus lines operation and an increase in reported losses and continued volatility in pro rata professional liability reinsurance business written from accident years 1997 to 2001. See Note 4 for information regarding applicable reinsurance coverage.

On December 6, 2004, the New York jury in the trial regarding the insurance coverage for the World Trade Center rendered a verdict that the September 11, 2001 attack on the World Trade Center constituted two occurrences under the policies issued by certain insurers. During 2005, the Company incurred and paid $1.3 million of losses as a result of this verdict. The Company considers the jury's verdict to be contrary to the terms of the insurance coverage in force and to the intent of the parties involved. Because the litigation is continuing and the appraisal and valuation process is ongoing, the ultimate resolution of this issue cannot be determined at this time. The Company estimates that it could be required to incur an additional charge of up to $4 million pre-tax at the Run-off Operations if it is ultimately determined that the September 11, 2001 attack on the World Trade Center constituted two occurrences under the policies issued by certain of its ceding companies and if as a result of this determination, additional losses are incurred by its ceding companies.
 
Estimating reserves for asbestos and environmental exposures continues to be difficult because of several factors, including: (i) evolving methodologies for the estimation of the liabilities; (ii) lack of reliable historical claim data; (iii) uncertainties with respect to insurance and reinsurance coverage related to these obligations; (iv) changing judicial interpretations; and (v) changing government standards. Management believes that its reserves for asbestos and environmental claims are appropriately established based upon known facts, existing case law and generally accepted actuarial methodologies. However, the potential exists for changes in Federal and state standards for clean-up and liability and changing interpretations by courts resulting from the resolution of coverage issues.  These coverage issues in cases in which the company is a party include disputes concerning proof of insurance coverage, questions of allocation of liability and damages among the insured and participating insurers, assertions that asbestos claims are not products or completed operations claims subject to an aggregate limit and contentions that more than a single occurrence exists for purposes of determining the available coverage.  Therefore our ultimate exposure for these claims may vary significantly from the amounts currently recorded, resulting in a potential future adjustment that could be material to our financial condition and results of operations.
 
Management believes that its unpaid losses and LAE are fairly stated at September 30, 2005. However, estimating the ultimate claims liability is necessarily a complex and judgmental process inasmuch as the amounts are based on management’s informed estimates, assumptions and judgments using data currently available. As additional experience and data become available regarding claims payment and reporting patterns, legal and legislative developments, judicial theories of liability, the impact of regulatory trends on benefit levels for both medical and indemnity payments, changes in social attitudes and economic conditions, the estimates are revised accordingly. If the Company’s ultimate losses, net of reinsurance, prove to differ substantially from the amounts recorded at September 30, 2005, the related adjustments could have a material adverse impact on the Company’s financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.

4. REINSURANCE

The Company follows the customary practice of reinsuring with other insurance companies a portion of the risks under the policies written by its insurance subsidiaries. The Company’s insurance and reinsurance subsidiaries maintain reinsurance to protect themselves against the severity of losses on individual claims and unusually serious occurrences in which a number of claims in aggregate produce a significant loss. Although reinsurance does not discharge the insurance

7

 
subsidiaries from their primary liabilities to their policyholders for losses insured under the insurance policies, it does make the assuming reinsurer liable to the insurance subsidiaries for the reinsured portion of the risk.
 
The components of net premiums written and earned, and losses and LAE incurred are as follows:
 
   
 Three Months Ended   
 
 Nine Months Ended   
 
 
 
 September 30,   
 
 September 30,   
 
(in thousands)
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
                       
Premiums written:
                     
Direct
 
$
122,151
 
$
99,855
 
$
321,144
 
$
320,727
 
Assumed
   
7,955
   
158
   
25,344
   
(38,405
)
Ceded
   
(12,635
)
 
(16,446
)
 
(35,421
)
 
(37,384
)
Net
 
$
117,471
 
$
83,567
 
$
311,067
 
$
244,938
 
Premiums earned:
                         
Direct
 
$
96,894
 
$
106,721
 
$
278,485
 
$
367,091
 
Assumed
   
8,498
   
16,123
   
25,119
   
125,067
 
Ceded
   
(13,169
)
 
(18,634
)
 
(34,938
)
 
(63,331
)
Net
 
$
92,223
 
$
104,210
 
$
268,666
 
$
428,827
 
Losses and LAE:
                         
Direct
 
$
73,177
 
$
95,086
 
$
241,608
 
$
299,410
 
Assumed
   
9,830
   
11,480
   
38,098
   
100,519
 
Ceded
   
(14,895
)
 
(25,860
)
 
(54,345
)
 
(89,562
)
Net
 
$
68,112
 
$
80,706
 
$
225,361
 
$
310,367
 
                           
                           
                           

In 2004, the Company purchased reinsurance covering potential adverse prior year loss development of the loss and LAE reserves of the Run-off Operations. During the first quarter of 2005, the Run-off Operations ceded $30 million in losses and LAE under this agreement. See Note 3 for additional information about prior year loss reserve development at the Run-off Operations. Because the coverage is retroactive, the Run-off Operations deferred the initial benefit of this cession, which will be amortized over the estimated settlement period of the losses using the interest method. Accordingly, the Company has a deferred gain on retroactive reinsurance of $27.6 million at September 30, 2005, which is included in accounts payable, accrued expenses and other liabilities on the Balance Sheet. Amortization of the deferred gain in the three and nine month periods ended September 30, 2005, reduced net loss and loss adjustment expenses by $414,000 and $2.4 million, respectively. At September 30, 2005, the Run-off Operations has $75 million of available coverage under this agreement for future adverse loss development.

Any future cession of losses will require the Run-off Operations to cede additional premiums of up to $28.3 million on a pro rata basis, at the following contractually determined levels:


Additional
   
Losses ceded
 
Additional premiums
$0 - $20 million
 
Up to $13.3 million
$20 - $50 million
 
Up to $15 million
$50 - $75 million
 
No additional premiums
     
     

In addition, the contract requires additional premiums of $2.5 million if it is not commuted by December 2007. The additional premiums have been prepaid and are included in other assets on the Balance Sheet.

The PMA Insurance Group has recorded reinsurance receivables of $13.9 million at September 30, 2005, related to certain umbrella policies covering years prior to 1977. The reinsurer has disputed the extent of coverage under these policies. The ultimate resolution of this dispute cannot be determined at this time. An unfavorable resolution of the dispute could have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial condition and results of operations.

8


5.
DEBT
 
The components of long-term debt are as follows:


   
As of
 
As of
 
 
 
September 30,
 
December 31,
 
(dollar amounts in thousands)
 
2005
 
2004
 
6.50% Convertible Debt
 
$
94,640
 
$
99,140
 
Derivative component of 6.50% Convertible Debt
   
13,117
   
13,086
 
4.25% Convertible Debt
   
655
   
925
 
8.50% Senior Notes
   
57,500
   
57,500
 
Trust preferred debt
   
43,816
   
43,816
 
Surplus Notes
   
10,000
   
-
 
Unamortized debt discount
   
(2,920
)
 
(3,683
)
Total long-term debt
 
$
216,808
 
$
210,784
 
               
               
               

On September 29, 2005, the Company issued, through one of its insurance subsidiaries, $10.0 million of Floating Rate Surplus Notes due 2035 (“Surplus Notes”). The Surplus Notes may be redeemed in whole or in part on or after November 2, 2010. The Surplus Notes bear an annual interest rate of London InterBank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”) plus 4.5%. At September 30, 2005, the interest rate on the Surplus Notes was 8.51%. The Company used $4.9 million of the $9.7 million net proceeds to purchase, in the open market, $4.5 million principal amount of its outstanding 6.50% Senior Secured Convertible Debt due 2022 (“6.50% Convertible Debt”). Subsequent to September 30, 2005, the Company used the remaining proceeds from the issuance of the Surplus Notes as well as a portion of the Run-off Operations’ assets to purchase an additional $18.7 million principal amount of its 6.50% Convertible Debt.  The Company paid $25.2 million for these bond purchases, exclusive of accrued interest. As the derivative component of the bonds was already reflected in the debt balance, the purchase activity did not result in any significant realized gain or loss.

6.
COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

The Company’s businesses are subject to a changing social, economic, legal, legislative and regulatory environment that could materially affect them. Some of the changes include initiatives to restrict insurance pricing and the application of underwriting standards and reinterpretations of insurance contracts long after the policies were written in an effort to provide coverage unanticipated by the Company. The eventual effect on the Company of the changing environment in which it operates remains uncertain.

In the event a property and casualty insurer operating in a jurisdiction where the Company’s insurance subsidiaries also operate becomes or is declared insolvent, state insurance regulations provide for the assessment of other insurers to fund any capital deficiency of the insolvent insurer. Generally, this assessment is based upon the ratio of an insurer’s voluntary premiums written to the total premiums written for all insurers in that particular jurisdiction. As of September 30, 2005, the Company had recorded a liability of $4.4 million for these assessments, which is included in accounts payable, accrued expenses and other liabilities on the Balance Sheet.

Under the terms of the sale of one of the Company’s insurance subsidiaries in 1998, the Company has agreed to indemnify the buyer, up to a maximum of $15.0 million if the actual claim payments in the aggregate exceed the estimated payments upon which the loss reserves of the former subsidiary were established. If the actual claim payments in the aggregate are less than the estimated payments upon which the loss reserves have been established, the Company will participate in such favorable loss reserve development.

See Note 3 for information regarding losses related to the September 11, 2001 attack on the World Trade Center and Note 4 for information regarding disputed reinsurance receivables.

The Company is continuously involved in numerous lawsuits arising, for the most part, in the ordinary course of business, either as a liability insurer defending third-party claims brought against its insureds, or as an insurer defending coverage claims brought against it by its policyholders or other insurers. While the outcome of all litigation involving the Company, including insurance-related litigation, cannot be determined, litigation is not expected to result in losses that differ from

9

 
recorded reserves by amounts that would be material to the Company’s financial condition, results of operations or liquidity. In addition, reinsurance recoveries related to claims in litigation, net of the allowance for uncollectible reinsurance, are not expected to result in recoveries that differ from recorded receivables by amounts that would be material to the Company’s financial condition, results of operations or liquidity.
 
The Company and certain of its directors and key executive officers are defendants in several purported class actions that were filed in 2003 in the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Pennsylvania by alleged purchasers of the Company’s Class A Common Stock, 4.25% Senior Convertible Debt due 2022 (“4.25% Convertible Debt”) and 8.50% Monthly Income Senior Notes. On June 28, 2004, the District Court issued an order consolidating the cases under the caption In Re PMA Capital Corporation Securities Litigation (civil action no. 03-6121) and appointing Sheet Metal Workers Local 9 Pension Trust, Alaska Laborers Employers Retirement Fund and Communications Workers of America for Employees’ Pension and Death Benefits as lead plaintiff. On September 20, 2004, the plaintiffs filed an amended and consolidated complaint on behalf of an alleged class of purchasers of the Company’s securities between May 5, 1999 and February 11, 2004. The complaint alleges, among other things, that the defendants violated Section 10(b) of the Exchange Act, and Rule 10b-5 thereunder by making materially false and misleading public statements and material omissions during the class period regarding the Company’s underwriting performance, loss reserves and related internal controls. The complaint alleges, among other things, that the defendants violated Sections 11, 12(a) (2) and 15 of the Securities Act by making materially false and misleading statements in registration statements and prospectuses about the Company’s financial results, underwriting performance, loss reserves and related internal controls. The complaint seeks unspecified compensatory damages, the right to rescind the purchases of securities in the public offerings, interest, and plaintiffs’ reasonable costs and expenses, including attorneys’ fees and expert fees. The Company intends to vigorously defend against the claims asserted in this consolidated action. By Order dated July 27, 2005, the District Court partially granted the Company’s previously filed Motion to Dismiss the Amended Complaint, dismissing all allegations with respect to The PMA Insurance Group, and otherwise denied the Motion to Dismiss. The lawsuit is in its earliest stages; therefore, it is not possible at this time to reasonably estimate the impact on the Company. However, the lawsuit may have a material adverse effect on the Company’s financial condition, results of operations and liquidity.

7.
SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

In March 2005, the Compensation Committee of the Company’s Board of Directors approved the issuance of 394,283 options to purchase Class A Common stock under the Company’s 2002 Equity Incentive Plan. All of these stock options were granted with an exercise price of $7.87 per share, which equaled the market value of the Class A Common stock on the grant date, and a fair value of $3.64 per share. The stock options vest over a period of two years. There were 2,162,937 stock options outstanding as of September 30, 2005.

In May 2005, the Company granted 42,744 shares of restricted Class A Common stock under the 2004 Directors Compensation Plan. The restricted shares vest (restrictions lapse) between one and three years. 

10


8.
EARNINGS PER SHARE
 
The table below reconciles the numerator and the denominator used in the diluted earnings per share calculation:


   
Three Months Ended
 
Nine Months Ended
 
 
 
September 30,
 
September 30,
 
(dollar amounts in thousands)
 
2005
 
2004
 
2005
 
2004
 
                   
Numerator:
                 
Net income (loss)
 
$
740
 
$
(74
)
$
(19,794
)
$
12,143
 
Interest on convertible debt, net of tax
   
-
   
-
   
-
   
1,787
 
Net income (loss) before interest on convertible debt
 
$
740
 
$
(74
)
$
(19,794
)
$
13,930
 
                           
Denominator:
                         
Basic shares
   
31,774,255
   
31,350,825
   
31,631,850
   
31,342,854
 
Dilutive effect of:
                         
Convertible debt
   
-
   
-
   
-
   
5,269,427
 
Stock options
   
330,686
   
-
   
-
   
75,309
 
Restricted stock
   
139,354
   
-
   
-
   
216,375
 
Total diluted shares
   
32,244,295
   
31,350,825
   
31,631,850
   
36,903,965
 
                           
                           
                           

The effect of the potential conversion of the Company’s 6.50% Convertible Debt and 4.25% Convertible Debt into 6.1 million, 5.3 million and 6.1 million shares of Class A Common stock were excluded from the computation of diluted earnings per share for the three months ended September 30, 2005 and 2004, and the nine month period ended September 30, 2005, respectively, because they were anti-dilutive.

The effects of 765,100 and 2.2 million stock options were excluded from the computation of diluted earnings per share for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, and the effects of 2.9 million and 2.0 million stock options were excluded from the computation of diluted earnings per share for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2004, because they were anti-dilutive. Also excluded from the nine months ended September 30, 2005 and the three months ended September 30, 2004 were the effects of 189,673 and 330,926 shares of restricted stock because they were anti-dilutive.

9.
EMPLOYEE RETIREMENT, POSTRETIREMENT AND POSTEMPLOYMENT BENEFITS
 
The Company sponsors a qualified non-contributory defined benefit pension plan (the “Qualified Pension Plan”) covering substantially all employees and maintains non-qualified unfunded supplemental defined benefit pension plans (the “Non-qualified Pension Plans”) for the benefit of certain key employees. In addition to providing pension benefits, the Company provides certain health care benefits for retired employees and their spouses.
 
On October 27, 2005, the Company announced that it decided to "freeze" its Qualified Pension Plan and Non-qualified Pension Plans and replace the ongoing benefits from these plans with a defined contribution plan. This change will result in a fourth quarter non-cash charge of approximately $700,000. 

11


The components of the Company’s net periodic benefit cost for pension and other postretirement benefits are as follows:


   
Pension Benefits      
 
   
Three months ended  
 
Nine months ended  
 
 
 
September 30,  
 
September 30,  
 
(dollar amounts in thousands)
 
2005
 
2004
 
2005
 
2004
 
                   
Components of net periodic benefit cost:
 
 
         
 
 
Service cost
 
$
869
 
$
554
 
$
2,795
 
$
2,640
 
Interest cost
   
1,287
   
1,188
   
3,902
   
3,704
 
Expected return on plan assets
   
(1,355
)
 
(1,289
)
 
(4,065
)
 
(3,899
)
Amortization of transition obligation
   
(1
)
 
(1
)
 
(3
)
 
(3
)
Amortization of prior service cost
   
1
   
1
   
4
   
3
 
Recognized actuarial gain
   
414
   
419
   
1,242
   
1,231
 
Net periodic pension cost
 
$
1,215
 
$
872
 
$
3,875
 
$
3,676
 
 
                 
Weighted average assumptions:
                         
Discount rate
   
6.00
%
 
6.25
%
 
6.00
%
 
6.25
%
Expected return on plan assets
   
8.50
%
 
8.50
%
 
8.50
%
 
8.50
%
Rate of compensation increase
   
3.75
%
 
4.00
%
 
3.75
%
 
4.00
%
                           
                           
                           


 
 
Other Postretirement Benefits
 
 
 
Three months ended
 
Nine months ended
 
 
 
September 30,
 
September 30,
 
(dollar amounts in thousands)
 
2005
 
2004
 
2005
 
2004
 
                   
Components of net periodic benefit cost:
 
 
     
 
 
 
 
Service cost
 
$
120
 
$
105
 
$
362
 
$
315
 
Interest cost
   
151
   
139
   
455
   
449
 
Amortization of prior service cost
   
(29
)
 
(30
)
 
(89
)
 
(90
)
Recognized actuarial loss
   
(29
)
 
(44
)
 
(88
)
 
(106
)
Net periodic pension cost
 
$
213
 
$
170
 
$
640
 
$
568
 
 
                 
Weighted average discount rate
   
6.00
%
 
6.25
%
 
6.00
%
 
6.25
%
                           
                           
                           
 
10.
RUN-OFF OPERATIONS

Run-off Operations includes the results of the Company’s former reinsurance and excess and surplus lines businesses. The Company withdrew from the reinsurance business in 2003 and the excess and surplus lines business in 2002.

As a result of the decision to exit from and run off the reinsurance business, approximately 94 employees have been terminated in accordance with the Company’s exit plan. Employee termination benefits of $4.6 million have been paid in accordance with this plan, including $1.3 million in the nine months ended September 30, 2005. At September 30, 2005, 44 positions, primarily claims and financial, remain. The Company has established an employee retention arrangement for the remaining employees. Under this arrangement, the Run-off Operations recorded expenses of $381,000 and $1.0 million, which include retention bonuses and severance, for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, and expects to record expenses of approximately $380,000 for the remainder of 2005.
 

12

 
 
11. BUSINESS SEGMENTS

The Company's total revenues, substantially all of which are generated within the U.S., and pre-tax operating income (loss) by principal business segment are presented in the table below.

Operating income (loss), which is GAAP net income (loss) excluding net realized investment gains and losses, is the financial performance measure used by the Company’s management and Board of Directors to evaluate and assess the results of the Company’s insurance businesses because (i) net realized investment gains and losses are unpredictable and not necessarily indicative of current operating fundamentals or future performance of the business segments and (ii) in many instances, decisions to buy and sell securities are made at the holding company level, and such decisions result in net realized gains and losses that do not relate to the operations of the individual segments. Operating income (loss) does not replace net income (loss) as the GAAP measure of the Company’s consolidated results of operations.



   
  Three Months Ended  
   
 Nine Months Ended  
 
   
  September 30,  
 
  September 30,   
 
(in thousands)
 
 2005
 
2004
 
 2005
 
2004
 
                     
Revenues:
                   
The PMA Insurance Group
 
$
106,546
 
$
116,971
 
$
302,915
 
$
395,702
 
Run-off Operations
   
4,421
   
6,248
   
19,506
   
95,858
 
Corporate and Other
   
113
   
110
   
487
   
646
 
Net realized investment gains
   
483
   
3,515
   
3,201
   
14,363
 
Total revenues
 
$
111,563
 
$
126,844
 
$
326,109
 
$
506,569
 
 
                         
Components of net income (loss):
                         
Pre-tax operating income (loss):
                         
The PMA Insurance Group
 
$
6,600
 
$
3,537
 
$
18,153
 
$
12,905
 
Run-off Operations
   
(258
)
 
(2,115
)
 
(28,771
)
 
7,455
 
Corporate and Other
   
(5,609
)
 
(4,982
)
 
(17,497
)
 
(15,800
)
Net realized investment gains
   
483
   
3,515
   
3,201
   
14,363
 
Income (loss) before income taxes
   
1,216
   
(45
)
 
(24,914
)
 
18,923
 
Income tax expense (benefit)
   
476
   
29
   
(5,120
)
 
6,780
 
Net income (loss)
 
$
740
 
$
(74
)
$
(19,794
)
$
12,143
 
                           
                           

Net premiums earned by business segment are as follows:
 
   
Three Months Ended  
 
 Nine Months Ended  
 
 
 
September 30,  
 
 September 30,  
 
(in thousands)
 
2005
 
 2004
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
The PMA Insurance Group:
                    
Workers' compensation and integrated disability 
 
$
81,970
 
$
89,973
 
$
231,667
 
$
305,931
 
Commercial automobile 
   
5,869
   
7,440
   
17,379
   
26,726
 
Commercial multi-peril 
   
2,304
   
3,909
   
8,211
   
14,134
 
Other 
   
2,071
   
1,710
   
5,198
   
6,179
 
Total premiums earned 
   
92,214
   
103,032
   
262,455
   
352,970
 
Run-off Operations:
                         
Reinsurance 
   
205
   
1,390
   
6,710
   
76,443
 
Excess and surplus lines 
   
(1
)
 
(26
)
 
110
   
(25
)
Total premiums earned 
   
204
   
1,364
   
6,820
   
76,418
 
Corporate and Other
   
(195
)
 
(186
)
 
(609
)
 
(561
)
Consolidated net premiums earned
 
$
92,223
 
$
104,210
 
$
268,666
 
$
428,827
 
                           
                           
                           
                           


13


Item 2. Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

The following is a discussion of our financial condition as of September 30, 2005, compared with December 31, 2004, and our results of operations for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared with the same periods last year. This discussion should be read in conjunction with Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations included in our Annual Report on Form 10-K for the year ended December 31, 2004 (“2004 Form 10-K”), to which the reader is directed for additional information. The term "GAAP" refers to accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America.

This Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations (“MD&A”) contains forward-looking statements, which involve inherent risks and uncertainties. Statements that are not historical facts, including statements about our beliefs and expectations, are forward-looking statements. These statements are based upon current estimates, assumptions and projections. Actual results may differ materially from those projected in such forward-looking statements, and therefore, you should not place undue reliance on them. See the Cautionary Statements on page 28 for a list of factors that could cause our actual results to differ materially from those contained in any forward-looking statement. Also, see “Item 1 - Business - Risk Factors” in our 2004 Form 10-K for a further discussion of risks that could materially affect our business.

OVERVIEW

We are a property and casualty insurance holding company, which offers through our subsidiaries workers’ compensation, integrated disability and, to a lesser extent, other standard lines of commercial insurance, primarily in the eastern part of the United States. These products are written through The PMA Insurance Group business segment. Our Run-off Operations include our prior reinsurance and excess and surplus lines businesses.

Our business profile changed significantly in 2003 and 2004. On November 4, 2003, we announced a third quarter pre-tax charge of $150 million to increase the loss reserves for our reinsurance business for prior accident years. Following this announcement, A.M. Best Company, Inc. (“A.M. Best”) reduced the financial strength ratings of PMA Capital Insurance Company (“PMACIC”), our reinsurance subsidiary, and The PMA Insurance Group companies, our primary insurance business, to B++ (Very Good). On November 6, 2003, we announced our decision to cease writing reinsurance business and to run off our existing reinsurance business. We also decided to suspend payment of dividends on our Class A common stock.

During 2004, we changed our corporate structure and extended the maturity on our convertible debt, which improved our corporate capital structure. In November 2004, the A.M. Best financial strength rating of The PMA Insurance Group was restored to A- (Excellent). We saw a continued increase in new business at The PMA Insurance Group, with $40.2 million and $90.0 million of new business in the third quarter and first nine months of 2005, up from $10.3 million and $36.5 million for the same periods last year. Our new business written through September has already surpassed the $46.4 million in new business for the full year of 2004. Our renewal retention rate increased to 74% for workers’ compensation business during the first nine months of 2005, up from 62% last year. The improving retention rates and new business opportunities allowed our direct written premiums to increase 22% in the third quarter 2005 compared to the same period of 2004. Although direct premiums written in the first half of 2005 were significantly lower than in the same period last year, by September 30, 2005 year-to-date direct written premiums were flat compared to the same period last year. We believe the positive momentum achieved during the second and third quarters will continue, and expect a 4% increase in direct premiums written for the full year compared to 2004.
 
On September 29, 2005, we issued, through one of our insurance subsidiaries, $10.0 million of Floating Rate Surplus Notes due 2035 (“Surplus Notes”). We used $4.9 million of the $9.7 million net proceeds to purchase, in the open market, $4.5 million aggregate principal amount of our outstanding 6.50% Senior Secured Convertible Debt due 2022 (“6.50% Convertible Debt”).  Subsequent to September 30, 2005, we used the remaining proceeds from the issuance of the Surplus Notes as well as a portion of the Run-off Operations’ assets to purchase an additional $18.7 million principal amount of our 6.50% Convertible Debt.  We paid $25.2 million for these bond purchases, exclusive of accrued interest.

We have $94.6 million aggregate principal amount of 6.50% Convertible Debt outstanding at September 30, 2005. Holders, at their option, may require us to repurchase all or a portion of this debt on June 30, 2009 at 114% of the
 

14

 
principal amount. We expect to be able to receive capital distributions from our principal operating subsidiaries sufficient to repurchase this debt on the put date of June 30, 2009.
 
PMACIC, our reinsurance subsidiary which is in run-off, owned the primary insurance subsidiaries that comprise The PMA Insurance Group, or the Pooled Companies, until June 2004. In its Order approving the transfer of the Pooled Companies from PMACIC to PMA Capital Corporation, the Pennsylvania Insurance Department prohibited PMACIC from any declaration or payment of dividends, return of capital or any other types of distributions in 2004 and 2005 to PMA Capital Corporation. In 2006, PMACIC may declare and pay ordinary dividends or returns of capital without the prior approval of the Pennsylvania Insurance Department if, immediately after giving effect to the dividend or return of capital, PMACIC’s risk-based capital equals or exceeds 225% of Authorized Control Level Capital as defined by the National Association of Insurance Commissioners. In 2007 and beyond, PMACIC may make dividend payments, as long as such dividends are not considered “extraordinary” under Pennsylvania insurance law. At December 31, 2004, PMACIC’s risk-based capital was 379% of Authorized Control Level Capital.

The PMA Insurance Group earns revenue and generates cash primarily by writing insurance policies and collecting insurance premiums. The PMA Insurance Group also earns other revenues by providing risk control and claims adjusting services to customers. Because time normally elapses between the receipt of premiums and the payment of claims and certain related expenses, we invest the available premiums and earn investment income. From our revenues are deducted:

 
·
losses we pay under insurance policies that we write;
 
·
loss adjustment expenses (“LAE”), which are the expenses of settling claims;
 
·
acquisition and operating expenses, which are direct and indirect costs of acquiring both new and renewal business, including commissions paid to agents and brokers, and the internal expenses to operate the business segment; and
 
·
dividends that are paid to policyholders of certain of our insurance products.

Losses and LAE are the most significant expense items affecting our insurance business and represent the most significant accounting estimates in our financial statements. We establish reserves representing estimates of future amounts needed to pay claims with respect to insured events that have occurred, including events that have not been reported to us. We also establish reserves for LAE, which represent the estimated expenses of settling claims, including legal and other fees, and general expenses of administering the claims adjustment process. Reserves are estimates of amounts to be paid in the future for losses and LAE and do not and cannot represent an exact measure of liability. If actual losses and LAE are larger than our loss reserve estimates, or if actual claims reported to us exceed our estimate of the number of claims to be reported to us, we have to increase reserve estimates with respect to prior periods. Changes in reserve estimates may be due to a wide range of factors, including inflation, changes in claims and litigation trends and legislative or regulatory changes. We incur a charge to earnings in the period the reserves are increased. In the first quarter of 2005, we recorded a $30 million pre-tax charge to increase loss reserves for prior accident years in our Run-off Operations segment. See “Results of Operations - Consolidated Results” beginning on page 15, “Run-off Operations” beginning on page 19 and Notes 3 and 4 to our Unaudited Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information regarding this charge.

RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

Consolidated Results

We recorded net income of $740,000 and a net loss of $19.8 million for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, respectively, compared to a net loss of $74,000 and net income of $12.1 million for the same periods last year. The net loss for the nine months ended September 30, 2005, included a first quarter after-tax charge of $23 million ($30 million pre-tax) for prior year loss development at the Run-off Operations.
 
Included in net income for the third quarter and net loss for the first nine months of 2005 were after-tax net realized investment gains of $314,000 and $2.1 million. For the three and nine months ended September 30, 2004 we had after-tax net realized investment gains of $2.3 million and $9.3 million. After-tax net realized investment gains for the third quarter
 
 
 

15

 
and first nine months of 2005 were reduced by $1.9 million and $425,000 due to the increase in the fair value of the derivative component of our 6.50% Convertible Debt.
 
Consolidated revenues for the third quarter of 2005 were $111.6 million compared to $126.8 million for the same period last year. For the first nine months of 2005, revenues were $326.1 million, compared to $506.6 million for the same period in 2004. The decreases in revenues for the quarter and year-to-date periods were primarily due to lower net premiums earned at The PMA Insurance Group and lower earned premiums resulting from the run-off of our reinsurance business.

In this MD&A, in addition to providing consolidated net income (loss), we also provide segment operating income (loss) because we believe that it is a meaningful measure of the profit or loss generated by our operating segments. Operating income (loss), which is GAAP net income (loss) excluding net realized investment gains and losses, is the financial performance measure used by our management and Board of Directors to evaluate and assess the results of our insurance businesses because (i) net realized investment gains and losses are unpredictable and not necessarily indicative of current operating fundamentals or future performance of the business segments and (ii) in many instances, decisions to buy and sell securities are made at the holding company level, and such decisions result in net realized gains and losses that do not relate to the operations of the individual segments. Operating income (loss) does not replace net income (loss) as the GAAP measure of our consolidated results of operations. Accordingly, we report operating income by segment in Note 11 to our Unaudited Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements.

Following is a reconciliation of our segment operating results to GAAP net income (loss).


 
 
 Three Months Ended  
 
Nine Months Ended  
 
 
 
 September 30,  
 
September 30,  
 
(in thousands)
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
2005
 
 2004
 
                      
Components of net income (loss):
                    
Pre-tax operating income (loss):
                    
The PMA Insurance Group
 
$
6,600
 
$
3,537
 
$
18,153
 
$
12,905
 
Run-off Operations
   
(258
)
 
(2,115
)
 
(28,771
)
 
7,455
 
Corporate and Other
   
(5,609
)
 
(4,982
)
 
(17,497
)
 
(15,800
)
Net realized investment gains
   
483
   
3,515
   
3,201
   
14,363
 
Income before income taxes
   
1,216
   
(45
)
 
(24,914
)
 
18,923
 
Income tax expense (benefit)
   
476
   
29
   
(5,120
)
 
6,780
 
Net income (loss)
 
$
740
 
$
(74
)
$
(19,794
)
$
12,143
 
                           
                           
                           

We provide combined ratios and operating ratios for The PMA Insurance Group on page 17. The combined ratio is a measure of property and casualty underwriting performance. The combined ratio computed using GAAP-basis numbers is equal to losses and LAE, plus acquisition expenses, insurance-related operating expenses and policyholders’ dividends, where applicable, all divided by net premiums earned. A combined ratio of less than 100% reflects an underwriting profit. Because time normally elapses between the receipt of premiums and the payment of claims and certain related expenses, we invest the available premiums. Underwriting results do not include investment income from these funds. Given the long-tail nature of our liabilities, we believe that the operating ratios are also important in evaluating our business. The operating ratio is the combined ratio less the net investment income ratio, which is net investment income divided by premiums earned.

In this MD&A, we discuss the renewal retention rates of our business. The renewal retention rate is computed using the current period renewal premium, excluding pricing, exposure and policy form changes, as a percentage of the total premium available for renewal.

16


Segment Results

The PMA Insurance Group

Summarized financial results of The PMA Insurance Group are as follows:


   
 Three Months Ended  
 
Nine Months Ended  
 
 
 
 September 30,  
 
September 30,  
 
(dollar amounts in thousands)
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
2005
 
 2004
 
                      
Net premiums written
 
$
116,877
 
$
97,637
 
$
304,454
 
$
314,885
 
                           
Net premiums earned
 
$
92,214
 
$
103,032
 
$
262,455
 
$
352,970
 
Net investment income
   
8,160
   
8,083
   
23,417
   
24,475
 
Other revenues
   
6,172
   
5,856
   
17,043
   
18,257
 
Total revenues
   
106,546
   
116,971
   
302,915
   
395,702
 
 
                         
Losses and LAE
   
67,995
   
77,994
   
191,544
   
264,897
 
Acquisition and operating expenses
   
31,384
   
34,635
   
90,387
   
114,720
 
Dividends to policyholders
   
567
   
805
   
2,831
   
3,180
 
Total losses and expenses
   
99,946
   
113,434
   
284,762
   
382,797
 
                         
Pre-tax operating income
 
$
6,600
 
$
3,537
 
$
18,153
 
$
12,905
 
                         
Combined ratio
   
103.3
%
 
105.5
%
 
103.6
%
 
104.5
%
Less: net investment income ratio
   
(8.8
%)
 
(7.8
%)
 
(8.9
%)
 
(6.9
%)
Operating ratio
   
94.5
%
 
97.7
%
 
94.7
%
 
97.6
%


Pre-tax operating income for The PMA Insurance Group was $6.6 million and $18.2 million for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared to $3.5 million and $12.9 million for the same periods in 2004, primarily reflecting improved underwriting results.

Premiums
The PMA Insurance Group’s premiums are as follows:
 

 
 
 Three Months Ended   
 
 Nine Months Ended   
 
 
 
 September 30,   
 
 September 30,   
 
(in thousands)
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
                       
Workers' compensation and integrated disability:
                     
Direct premiums written
 
$
106,923
 
$
88,720
 
$
280,187
 
$
281,592
 
Premiums assumed
   
6,238
   
9,351
   
16,387
   
28,104
 
Premiums ceded
   
(10,026
)
 
(9,646
)
 
(28,203
)
 
(27,541
)
Net premiums written
 
$
103,135
 
$
88,425
 
$
268,371
 
$
282,155
 
                           
Commercial Lines:
                         
Direct premiums written
 
$
15,423
 
$
11,330
 
$
41,353
 
$
39,752
 
Premiums assumed
   
579
   
387
   
1,188
   
1,226
 
Premiums ceded
   
(2,260
)
 
(2,505
)
 
(6,458
)
 
(8,248
)
Net premiums written
 
$
13,742
 
$
9,212
 
$
36,083
 
$
32,730
 
                           
Total:
                         
Direct premiums written
 
$
122,346
 
$
100,050
 
$
321,540
 
$
321,344
 
Premiums assumed
   
6,817
   
9,738
   
17,575
   
29,330
 
Premiums ceded
   
(12,286
)
 
(12,151
)
 
(34,661
)
 
(35,789
)
Net premiums written
 
$
116,877
 
$
97,637
 
$
304,454
 
$
314,885
 
                           
 
                         
                           
 
17

Direct workers’ compensation and integrated disability premiums written were $106.9 million and $280.2 million for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared to $88.7 million and $281.6 million for the same periods in 2004. Our renewal retention rates on existing workers’ compensation accounts improved to 83% in the third quarter of 2005 compared to 64% in the third quarter of 2004 and improved to 74% for the nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared to 62% for the same period in 2004. The retention rate in 2005 was adversely impacted by the loss of a large account in January that switched brokers, which reduced the nine month 2005 retention rate by approximately 4 points. New workers’ compensation and integrated disability production was $32.7 million and $76.1 million for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared to $8.6 million and $32.4 million for the same periods in 2004. We obtained price increases for our workers’ compensation business of approximately 5% for the first nine months of 2005, compared to 6% for the same period last year.

Direct writings of commercial lines of business other than workers’ compensation, such as commercial auto, general liability, umbrella, multi-peril and commercial property lines (collectively, “Commercial Lines”) increased by $4.1 million and $1.6 million for the third quarter and the first nine months of 2005, compared to the same periods in 2004. Our renewal retention rate on existing Commercial Lines accounts improved to 78% in the first nine months of 2005, compared to 40% for the same period in 2004.

Premiums assumed decreased $2.9 million and $11.8 million for the third quarter and first nine months of 2005, compared to the same periods in 2004, due to a lower volume of involuntary market business assigned to us. Companies that write premiums in certain states generally must share in the risk of insuring entities that cannot obtain insurance in the voluntary market. Typically, an insurer’s share of this residual market business is dependent upon its market share in terms of direct premiums in the voluntary market for the prior year, and the assignments are accomplished either by direct assignment or by assumption from pools of residual market business.

Premiums ceded for workers’ compensation and integrated disability increased as a percentage of direct premiums earned during the first nine months of 2005, compared to the same period last year, primarily because The PMA Insurance Group lowered its aggregate deductible for losses in excess of $250,000 to $12.6 million from $18.8 million on its workers’ compensation reinsurance program. Premiums ceded for Commercial Lines decreased $245,000 and $1.8 million for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, primarily as a result of the decrease in direct premiums earned for commercial lines.

Net premiums written increased 20% for the third quarter and decreased 3% for the first nine months of 2005, compared to the same periods in 2004. Net premiums earned decreased 10% and 26% for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, respectively, compared to the same periods in 2004. Generally, trends in net premiums earned follow patterns similar to net premiums written adjusted for the customary lag related to the timing of premium writings within the year. The decrease in net premiums earned in the first nine months of 2005, compared to the same period in 2004, is greater than the decrease in net premiums written, reflecting the lower net premiums written throughout 2004. Direct premiums are earned principally on a pro rata basis over the terms of the policies. However, with respect to policies that provide for premium adjustments, such as experience-rated or exposure-based adjustments, such premium adjustment may be made subsequent to the end of the policy’s coverage period and will be recorded as earned premium in the period in which the adjustment is made.


18


Losses and Expenses

The components of the GAAP combined ratios are as follows:
 
 
 
Three Months Ended
 
Nine Months Ended
 
 
 
September 30,
 
September 30,
 
 
 
2005
 
2004
 
2005
 
2004
 
                   
Loss and LAE ratio
   
73.7
%
 
75.7
%
 
73.0
%
 
75.0
%
Expense ratio:
                 
Acquisition expenses
   
19.8
%
 
21.2
%
 
19.9
%
 
19.1
%
Operating expenses(1)
   
9.2
%
 
7.8
%
 
9.6
%
 
9.5
%
Total expense ratio
   
29.0
%
 
29.0
%
 
29.5
%
 
28.6
%
Policyholders' dividend ratio
   
0.6
%
 
0.8
%
 
1.1
%
 
0.9
%
Combined ratio
   
103.3
%
 
105.5
%
 
103.6
%
 
104.5
%
                           
 
                         
                           
 
(1)
The operating expense ratio equals insurance-related operating expenses divided by net premiums earned. Insurance-related operating expenses were $8.4 million and $25.3 million for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, respectively, and $8.1 million and $33.4 million for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2004, respectively.

The loss and LAE ratios improved 2.0 points for both the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, respectively, compared to the same periods in 2004, primarily reflecting a lower current accident year loss and LAE ratio in 2005 compared to 2004. The loss and LAE ratios for the third quarter and first nine months of 2004 include 1.0 point and 0.3 points for the third quarter hurricanes in the eastern part of the United States. Price increases and payroll inflation have offset an increase in overall loss trends in workers' compensation. The loss ratio has also benefited from our continued emphasis on managed care initiatives and a change in the geographic mix of our business. In addition, losses from hurricanes were $500,000 during the three and nine month periods ended September 30, 2005, compared to $1.0 million for the comparable periods of 2004. We expect medical cost inflation to remain a significant component of loss costs throughout 2005. We estimate our medical cost inflation for 2005 to be approximately 11%, the same as in 2004.

The total expense ratio remained flat in the third quarter and increased 0.9 points in the first nine months of 2005, compared to the same periods in 2004. The increase is mainly due to the impact on the acquisition ratio of lower net premiums earned in the first nine months of 2005, compared to the same periods last year partially offset by lower operating expenses. Overall acquisition and operating expenses at The PMA Insurance Group decreased by $3.3 million and $24.3 million for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared to the same periods last year.

Net Investment Income

Net investment income was up slightly to $8.2 million for the third quarter of 2005, compared to the same period of 2004, reflecting an increase in portfolio yields in the third quarter. Net investment income decreased by $1.1 million to $23.4 million for the first nine months of 2005 compared to the same period in 2004. Average invested assets decreased approximately 2% and invested asset yields declined 10 basis points for the nine month ended September 30, 2005, compared to the same period in 2004.

Other Revenues

Other revenues were $6.2 million and $17.0 million for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared to $5.9 million and $18.3 million for the same periods in 2004. The decrease in other revenues reflects lower service revenues for claims, risk management and related services provided on large deductible policies. Included in other revenues for the nine months ended September 30, 2004 is a $458,000 gain on sale of real estate.

Run-off Operations

Run-off Operations includes the results of the Company’s former reinsurance and excess and surplus lines businesses. The Company withdrew from the reinsurance business in 2003 and the excess and surplus lines business in 2002. See Note 10 to our Unaudited Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements for additional information regarding Run-off Operations.

19

Summarized financial results of the Run-off Operations are as follows:


   
Three Months Ended   
 
 Nine Months Ended   
 
 
 
September 30,   
 
 September 30,   
 
(in thousands)
 
2005
 
 2004
 
 2005
 
 2004
 
                      
Net premiums written
 
$
789
 
$
(13,884
)
$
7,222
 
$
(69,386
)
                           
Net premiums earned
 
$
204
 
$
1,364
 
$
6,820
 
$
76,418
 
Net investment income
   
4,217
   
4,884
   
12,686
   
19,440
 
Total revenues
   
4,421
   
6,248
   
19,506
   
95,858
 
                           
Losses and LAE
   
117
   
2,712
   
33,817
   
45,470
 
Acquisition and operating expenses
   
4,562
   
5,651
   
14,460
   
42,933
 
Total losses and expenses
   
4,679
   
8,363
   
48,277
   
88,403
 
                           
Pre-tax operating income (loss)
 
$
(258
)
$
(2,115
)
$
(28,771
)
$
7,455
 
                           
 
                         
                           

The Run-off Operations had pre-tax operating losses of $258,000 and $28.8 million for the third quarter and first nine months of 2005, compared to pre-tax operating losses of $2.1 million and pre-tax operating income of $7.5 million for the same periods in 2004. Results for the first nine months of 2005 included a first quarter charge of $30 million for prior year loss development, primarily related to policies covering contractors’ liability for construction defects from accident years 1998 to 2001 written by our former excess and surplus lines operation and pro rata professional liability reinsurance business from accident years 1997 to 2001.

Premiums are earned principally on a pro rata basis over the coverage periods of the underlying policies. However, with respect to policies that provide for premium adjustments, such as experience-rated or exposure-based adjustments, such premium adjustments may be made subsequent to the end of the policy’s coverage period and will be recorded as premiums earned in the period in which the adjustment is made. As a result of our exit from the reinsurance business, gross and net premiums written and earned in 2005 were primarily from policies that provide for premium adjustments. For the three and nine month periods ended September 30, 2004, the negative gross and net written premiums related to ceding companies canceling reinsurance contracts. Additionally, net premiums written and earned for the nine month period ended September 30, 2004 were reduced by a $5.2 million charge for the adverse development reinsurance agreement.

Losses and LAE incurred decreased $2.6 million for the three months ended September 30, 2005, compared to the same period in 2004, primarily as a result of a decrease in net premiums earned for the period and $414,000 in amortization of the deferred gain on losses ceded to our adverse development cover. Losses and LAE incurred decreased $11.7 million for the nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared to the same period in 2004, primarily due to the effect of lower net premiums earned in 2005, which was partially offset by the first quarter charge of $30 million for prior year loss development. Each quarter, our actuaries conduct their quarterly reserve review, which includes analyzing recent trends in the levels of the reported and paid claims to determine the impact of any emerging data on loss development trends and recorded unpaid losses and LAE reserves. In the first quarter of 2005, our actuaries identified higher than expected claim frequency and severity on policies covering contractors’ liability for construction defects from accident years 1998 to 2001 written by our former excess and surplus lines operation and an increase in reported losses and continued volatility in pro rata professional liability reinsurance business written from accident years 1997 to 2001. See Note 4 to our Unaudited Condensed Consolidated Financial Statements for information regarding applicable reinsurance coverage.

Acquisition and operating expenses for the third quarter and first nine months of 2005 decreased $1.1 million and $28.5 million, compared to the same periods in 2004, primarily reflecting lower commissions due to lower premium volume and, to a lesser extent, lower employee costs. Operating expenses for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2004 were reduced by $1.2 million and $2.5 million, respectively, for gains on the sale of our ownership in Cathedral Capital PLC, a Lloyd’s of London managing general agency.

20

Net investment income was $4.2 million for the third quarter of 2005, compared to $4.9 million for the same period in 2004, reflecting an average invested asset base that decreased approximately 35%, partially offset by higher interest earned of $1.3 million on funds held arrangements. Net investment income was $12.7 million for the first nine months of 2005, compared to $19.4 million for the same period last year, reflecting an average invested asset base that decreased approximately 43%, partially offset by higher interest earned of $4.5 million on funds held arrangements. In a funds held arrangement, the ceding company retains the premiums, and losses are offset against these funds in an experience account. Because the reinsurer is not in receipt of the funds, the reinsurer earns interest on the experience fund balance at a predetermined credited interest rate.

Corporate and Other

The Corporate and Other segment primarily includes corporate expenses, including debt service. Corporate and Other recorded pre-tax operating losses of $5.6 million and $17.5 million for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared to $5.0 million and $15.8 million for the same periods last year, reflecting higher interest expense, partially offset by lower operating expenses. Interest expense for three and nine months ended September 30, 2005 increased by $1.1 million and $3.2 million over the comparable periods last year, due to a higher average amount of debt outstanding and higher interest rates on our convertible debt.

Loss Reserves

At September 30, 2005, we estimated that under all insurance policies and reinsurance contracts issued by our insurance businesses the ultimate amount that we would have to pay for all events that occurred as of September 30, 2005 is $1,966.9 million. This amount includes estimated losses from claims plus estimated expenses to settle claims. Our estimate includes amounts for losses occurring on or prior to September 30, 2005, whether or not these claims have been reported to us.

Unpaid losses and LAE reflect management’s best estimate of future amounts needed to pay claims and related settlement costs with respect to insured events which have occurred, including events that have not been reported to us. Due to the “long-tail” nature of a significant portion of our business, in many cases, significant periods of time, ranging up to several years or more, may elapse between the occurrence of an insured loss, the reporting of the loss to us and our payment of that loss. We define long-tail business as those lines of business in which a majority of coverage involves average loss payment lags of several years beyond the expiration of the policy. Our major long-tail lines include our workers’ compensation and casualty reinsurance business. In addition, because reinsurers rely on their ceding companies to provide them with information regarding incurred losses, liabilities for reinsurers become known more slowly than for primary insurers and are subject to more unforeseen development and uncertainty. As part of the process for determining our unpaid losses and LAE, various actuarial models are used that analyze historical data and consider the impact of current developments and trends, such as trends in claims severity and frequency and claims settlement trends. Also considered are legal developments, regulatory trends, legislative developments, changes in social attitudes and economic conditions.

Reinsurers are dependent on their ceding companies for reporting information regarding incurred losses. The nature and extent of information provided to reinsurers may vary depending on the ceding company as well as the type of reinsurance purchased by the ceding company. Ceding companies may also independently adjust their reserves over time as they receive additional data on claims and go through their own actuarial process for evaluating reserves. For casualty lines of reinsurance, significant periods of time may elapse from the period that a loss is incurred and reported by the ceding company’s insured, the investigation and recognition of such loss by the ceding insurer, and the reporting of the loss and evaluation of coverage by a reinsurer. As all of the Company’s reinsurance business was produced through independent brokers, an additional lag occurs because the ceding companies report their experience to the placing broker, who then reports such information to the reinsurer. Because of these time lags, and because of the variability in reserving and reporting by ceding companies, reported claims for reinsurers become known more slowly than for primary insurers and are subject to more unforeseen development and uncertainty.

Management relies on various data in making its estimate of loss reserves for reinsurance. As described above, the reinsurer receives certain information from ceding companies through the reinsurance brokers. Management assesses the quality and timeliness of claims reporting by its ceding companies. The reinsurer also may supplement the reported information by requesting additional information and conducting reviews of certain of its ceding companies’ reserving and reporting practices. It also reviews its internal operations to assess its capabilities to timely receive and process reported
 

21

 
 
claims information from ceding companies. It assesses its claims data and loss projections in light of historical trends of claims developments, claims payments, and also as compared to industry data as a means of noticing unusual trends in claims development or payment. Based on the data reported by ceding companies, the results of the reviews and assessments noted above, as well as actuarial analysis and judgment, management will develop its estimate of reinsurance reserves.
 
In the ordinary course of the claims review process, we independently verify that reported claims are covered under the terms of the reinsurance policy or treaty purchased by the ceding company. In the event that we do not believe coverage has been provided, we will refuse to pay such claims. Most contracts contain a dispute resolution process that relies on arbitration to resolve any contractual differences. At September 30, 2005, we did not have any material claims that were in the process of arbitration that have not been recorded as liabilities on the accompanying financial statements.

We believe that because our former reinsurance business is in run-off, the potential for adverse reserve development is increased because we have ceased ongoing business relationships with most of our ceding companies. As a result, to the extent that there are disputes with our ceding companies over claims coverage or other issues, management believes that we will more likely be required to arbitrate these disputes. Although we believe that we have incorporated this potential in our reserve analyses, we also believe that as a result of the nature of the reinsurance business and the fact that the reinsurance business is in run-off, there exists a greater likelihood that reserves may develop in this segment.
 
Estimating reserves for asbestos and environmental exposures continues to be difficult because of several factors, including: (i) evolving methodologies for the estimation of the liabilities; (ii) lack of reliable historical claim data; (iii) uncertainties with respect to insurance and reinsurance coverage related to these obligations; (iv) changing judicial interpretations; and (v) changing government standards. Management believes that its reserves for asbestos and environmental claims are appropriately established based upon known facts, existing case law and generally accepted actuarial methodologies. However, the potential exists for changes in Federal and state standards for clean-up and liability and changing interpretations by courts resulting from the resolution of coverage issues.  These coverage issues in cases in which the company is a party include disputes concerning proof of insurance coverage, questions of allocation of liability and damages among the insured and participating insurers, assertions that asbestos claims are not products or completed operations claims subject to an aggregate limit and contentions that more than a single occurrence exists for purposes of determining the available coverage.  Therefore our ultimate exposure for these claims may vary significantly from the amounts currently recorded, resulting in a potential future adjustment that could be material to our financial condition and results of operations.
 
Management believes that its unpaid losses and LAE are fairly stated at September 30, 2005. However, estimating the ultimate claims liability is necessarily a complex and judgmental process inasmuch as the amounts are based on management’s informed estimates, assumptions and judgments using data currently available. As additional experience and data become available regarding claims payment and reporting patterns, legal and legislative developments, judicial theories of liability, the impact of regulatory trends on benefit levels for both medical and indemnity payments, changes in social attitudes and economic conditions, the estimates are revised accordingly. If our ultimate losses, net of reinsurance, prove to differ substantially from the amounts recorded at September 30, 2005, the related adjustments could have a material adverse impact on our financial condition, results of operations and liquidity. See “Run-off Operations” beginning on page 19 for additional information regarding increases in loss reserves for prior years.

For additional discussion of loss reserves and reinsurance, see pages 9 to 12 and 44 to 47 of our 2004 Form 10-K.



22


LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES

Liquidity is a measure of an entity’s ability to secure sufficient cash to meet its contractual obligations and operating needs. Our insurance operations generate cash by writing insurance policies and collecting premiums. The cash generated is used to pay losses and LAE and operating expenses. Any excess cash is invested and earns investment income. Net cash flows used in operating activities were lower in the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared to the same periods in 2004, primarily reflecting the commutation and novation of certain reinsurance and retrocessional contracts and the purchase of a reinsurance agreement covering potential adverse development by the Run-off Operations in the first nine months of 2004.

As a result of our decision to exit from the reinsurance and excess and surplus lines of business, we expect that we will continue to use cash from the operating activities of our Run-off Operations into the foreseeable future. We believe that the cash used to support the run-off of our business will reduce the liabilities that currently exist in the business, and allow us to reduce our capital commitment to the run-off business. As our capital commitment to the run-off business is reduced, we expect to be able to use such capital to assist us in reducing our current debt and managing our capital. We monitor the expected payout of the liabilities associated with the run-off business and generally adjust the duration of our invested assets to match the timing of expected payouts.

We expect that the cash flows generated from the operating activities of The PMA Insurance Group will be positive for the foreseeable future as we anticipate premium and other service revenue collections to exceed losses and LAE and operating expense payments. We intend to be able to invest these positive cash flows and earn investment income.

At the holding company level, our primary sources of liquidity are dividends and net tax payments received from subsidiaries and capital raising activities. We utilize cash to pay debt obligations, including interest costs; taxes to the federal government; and corporate expenses. As of September 30, 2005, we had $19.1 million in cash and short-term investments at the holding company and its non-regulated subsidiaries, which we believe combined with our other capital sources, will continue to provide us with sufficient funds to meet our foreseeable ongoing expenses and interest payments.

We have $94.6 million of 6.50% Convertible Debt outstanding at September 30, 2005. Holders, at their option, may require us to repurchase all or a portion of this debt on June 30, 2009 at 114% of the principal amount. We expect to be able to receive capital distributions from our principal operating subsidiaries sufficient to repurchase this debt on the put date of June 30, 2009.

PMACIC, our reinsurance subsidiary which is currently in run-off, had statutory surplus of $210.7 million as of September 30, 2005. However, in its Order approving the transfer of the Pooled Companies from PMACIC to PMA Capital Corporation, the Pennsylvania Insurance Department prohibited PMACIC from any declaration or payment of dividends, return of capital or other types of distributions in 2004 and 2005 to PMA Capital Corporation. In 2006, PMACIC may declare and pay ordinary dividends or return capital without the prior approval of the Pennsylvania Insurance Department if, immediately after giving effect to the dividend or return of capital, PMACIC’s risk-based capital equals or exceeds 225% of Authorized Control Level Capital, as defined by the National Association of Insurance Commissioners. In 2007 and beyond, PMACIC may make dividend payments, as long as such dividends are not considered “extraordinary” under Pennsylvania insurance law. At December 31, 2004, PMACIC’s risk-based capital was 379% of Authorized Control Level Capital.

The Pooled Companies are not subject to the Pennsylvania Insurance Department’s Order and have the ability to pay $23.5 million in dividends in 2005 without the prior approval of the Pennsylvania Insurance Department. In considering its future dividend policy, the Pooled Companies will consider, among other things, the impact of paying dividends on its financial strength ratings. The Pooled Companies had statutory surplus of $311.8 million as of September 30, 2005, including $10.0 million relating to the issuance of  Surplus Notes in September 2005.

As of September 30, 2005, our total outstanding debt was $216.8 million, including the $94.6 million of 6.50% Convertible Debt, compared to $210.8 million at December 31, 2004. The increase relates primarily to the issuance of $10 million in Surplus Notes by one of our insurance subsidiaries. This increase was partially offset by the open market purchase of $4.5 million principal amount of our outstanding 6.50% Convertible Debt with proceeds from the Surplus Notes. Subsequent to September 30, 2005, we used the remaining proceeds from the issuance of the Surplus Notes as well as a portion of the Run-off Operations’ assets to purchase an additional $18.7 million principal amount of our 6.50%
 

23

 
Convertible Debt.  We paid $25.2 million for these bond purchases, exclusive of accrued interest. We also retired $270,000 of our 4.25% Senior Convertible Debt due 2022 in the first nine months of 2005. This purchase and retirement activity has lowered our level of debt and increased its duration, which we believe provides us with a stronger, more flexible capital base.
 
We incurred interest expense of $4.1 million and $12.1 million for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared to $3.0 million and $8.9 million for the same periods last year. We paid interest of $5.3 million and $11.7 million in the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared to $3.7 million and $9.2 million for the same periods in 2004. The increase in interest expense and interest paid is due to a higher average amount of debt outstanding in the first nine months of 2005 and higher interest rates on our convertible debt, compared to the same period in 2004. We expect to pay interest of approximately $2 million for the remainder of 2005.

Net tax payments received from subsidiaries were $1.9 million and $3.8 million for the three and nine months ended September 30, 2005, compared to $1.9 million and $3.9 million for same prior year periods. Additionally, we received a tax refund of $3.2 million from the Internal Revenue Service during the first nine months of 2004.

Investment grade fixed income securities, all of which are publicly traded, constitute substantially all of our invested assets. The market value of these investments are subject to fluctuations in interest rates. Although we have structured our investment portfolio to provide an appropriate matching of maturities with anticipated claims payments, if we decide or are required in the future to sell securities in a rising interest rate environment, we would expect to incur losses from such sales.

Our investment strategy includes guidelines for asset quality standards, asset allocations among investment types and issuers, and other relevant criteria for our portfolio. In addition, invested asset cash flows consisting of current income and investment maturities, are structured after considering projected liability cash flows of loss reserve payouts that are based on actuarial models. Property and casualty claim payment demands are somewhat unpredictable in nature and require liquidity from the underlying invested assets, which are structured to emphasize current investment income while maintaining appropriate portfolio quality and diversity. The liquidity requirements are met primarily through operating cash flows and short-term investments.

As of September 30, 2005, the duration of our investments that support the insurance reserves was 3.7 years and the duration of our insurance reserves was 2.9 years. The difference in the duration of our investments and our insurance reserves reflects our decision to maintain longer asset duration in order to enhance overall yield.

In 2004, the Run-off Operations paid a $1.0 million fee to shorten the term of our Philadelphia office lease from fifteen years to seven years and reduce the leased space by approximately 75% effective October 1, 2004, which reduced our contractual obligations under the lease by $661,000 annually from 2005 through 2008, $870,000 in 2009 and $14.6 million thereafter. In addition to the reduced contractual obligations, we estimate that this change will also result in reduced related expenses of approximately $830,000 annually.
 
We did not declare or pay dividends in the first nine months of 2005 or 2004 and we have suspended common stock dividends at the current time.

INVESTMENTS


At September 30, 2005, our investment assets were carried at a fair value of $1,315.7 million and had an amortized cost of $1,314.0 million. The average credit quality of the portfolio is AA. At September 30, 2005, $13.1 million, or 1.0%, of our total investments were below investment grade, of which $3.7 million of these below investment grade investments were in an unrealized loss position, which totaled $156,000. At September 30, 2005, all of our fixed income investments were publicly traded and all were rated by at least one nationally recognized credit rating agency.

The net unrealized gain on our investments at September 30, 2005 was $1.7 million, or 0.1% of the amortized cost basis. The net unrealized gain included gross unrealized gains of $20.7 million and gross unrealized losses of $19.0 million. For all but two securities, which were carried at fair values of $15.9 million and $885,000 at September 30, 2005, we determine the market value of each fixed income security using prices obtained in the public markets. For these two securities, whose fair values are not reliably determined from these public market sources, we utilized the services of
 

24

 
outside professional investment asset managers to determine the fair value. The asset managers determine the fair value of the securities by using a discounted present value of the estimated future cash flows (interest and principal repayment).
 
We review the securities in our fixed income portfolio on a periodic basis to specifically identify individual securities for any meaningful decline in fair value below amortized cost. Our analysis addresses all securities whose fair value is significantly below amortized cost at the time of the analysis, with additional emphasis placed on securities whose fair value has been below amortized cost for an extended period of time. As part of our periodic review process, we utilize the expertise of our outside professional asset managers who provide us with an updated assessment of each issuer’s current credit situation based on recent issuer activities, such as quarterly earnings announcements or other pertinent financial news for the company, recent developments in a particular industry, economic outlook for a particular industry and rating agency actions.

In addition to company-specific financial information and general economic data, we also consider our ability and intent to hold a particular security to maturity or until the fair value of the security recovers to a level at least equal to the amortized cost. Our ability and intent to hold securities to such time is evidenced by our strategy and process to match the cash flow characteristics of the invested asset portfolio, both interest income and principal repayment, to the actuarially determined estimated liability pay-out patterns of each insurance company’s claims liabilities. Where we determine that a security’s unrealized loss is other than temporary, a realized loss is recognized in the period in which the decline in value is determined to be other than temporary.

Based on our evaluation as of September 30, 2005, we determined there were no other than temporary declines in fair value of securities during the three month periods ended September 30, 2005 and 2004. We recorded impairment losses for securities issued by two auto manufacturers and one retail department store, resulting in an impairment charge of $1.0 million pre-tax during the nine months ended September 30, 2005. Impairment charges for the nine months ended September 30, 2004 were $333,000 pre-tax related to one asset-backed security. The write-downs were measured based on public market prices and our expectation of the future realizable value for the security at the time we determined the decline in value was other than temporary.

During the nine months ended September 30, 2005, we had gross realized gains and losses of $5.5 million and $2.3 million, respectively. Of the $2.3 million in realized losses, $654,000 resulted from the increase in the fair value of the derivative component of our 6.50% Convertible Debt. The remaining losses were primarily attributable to impairment losses as discussed above. The gross realized gains resulted primarily from the repositioning of invested assets to shorten our portfolio duration.

As of  September 30, 2005, our investment asset portfolio had gross unrealized losses of $19.0 million. For securities that were in an unrealized loss position at September 30, 2005, the length of time that such securities have been in an unrealized loss position, as measured by their month-end market values, is as follows:
 

                       
       
 
 
 
 
 
 
Percentage
 
 
 
Number of
 
Fair
 
Amortized
 
Unrealized
 
Fair Value to
 
(dollar amounts in millions)
 
Securities
 
Value
 
Cost
 
Loss
 
Amortized Cost
 
                       
Less than 6 months
   
238
 
$
203.0
 
$
205.6
 
$
(2.6
)
 
99
%
6 to 9 months
   
59
   
51.2
   
52.0
   
(0.8
)
 
98
%
9 to 12 months
   
69
   
61.4
   
62.8
   
(1.4
)
 
98
%
More than 12 months
   
103
   
138.5
   
146.6
   
(8.1
)
 
94
%
    Subtotal
   
469
   
454.1
   
467.0
   
(12.9
)
 
97
%
U.S. Treasury and
                               
    Agency securities
   
171
   
318.7
   
324.8
   
(6.1
)
 
98
%
Total
   
640
 
$
772.8
 
$
791.8
 
$
(19.0
)
 
98
%
                                 
                                 
                                 

Of the 103 securities that have been in an unrealized loss position for more than 12 months, 102 securities have an unrealized loss of less than $1 million each and less than 20% of each security's amortized cost. These 102 securities have a total fair value of 97% of the amortized cost basis at September 30, 2005, and the average unrealized loss per security is approximately $39,000. There is only one security out of the 103 with an unrealized loss in excess of $1 million at
 

25

 
 
September 30, 2005, and it has a fair value of $15.9 million and a par value and cost of $20.0 million. The security, which matures in 2011, is a structured security backed by a U.S. Treasury Strip, and is rated AAA. We have both the ability and intent to hold this security until it matures.
 
The contractual maturity of securities in an unrealized loss position at September 30, 2005 was as follows:


   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Percentage
 
 
 
Fair
 
Amortized
 
Unrealized
 
Fair Value to
 
(dollar amounts in millions)
 
Value
 
Cost
 
Loss
 
Amortized Cost
 
                   
2005
 
$
0.8
 
$
0.8
 
$
-
   
100
%
2006-2009
   
116.9
   
119.4
   
(2.5
)
 
98
%
2010-2014
   
97.6
   
99.5
   
(1.9
)
 
98
%
2015 and later
   
29.5
   
30.2
   
(0.7
)
 
98
%
Mortgage-backed and other
                         
asset-backed securities
   
209.3
   
217.1
   
(7.8
)
 
96
%
Subtotal
   
454.1
   
467.0
   
(12.9
)
 
97
%
U.S. Treasury and Agency
                         
securities
   
318.7
   
324.8
   
(6.1
)
 
98
%
Total
 
$
772.8
 
$
791.8
 
$
(19.0
)
 
98
%
                           
                           
                           


OTHER MATTERS

Other Factors Affecting Our Business

In general, our businesses are subject to a changing social, economic, legal, legislative and regulatory environment that could materially affect them. Some of the changes include initiatives to restrict insurance pricing and the application of underwriting standards and reinterpretations of insurance contracts long after the policies were written in an effort to provide coverage unanticipated by us. The eventual effect on us of the changing environment in which we operate remains uncertain.

The New York Attorney General and certain other state regulators have initiated investigations and commenced legal actions against certain brokers and other insurance companies concerning their compensation agreements and other practices.  Various states’ Insurance Departments and Attorneys General have also responded to recent publicity surrounding broker compensation practices by issuing inquiries and subpoenas to insurance companies and insurance producers domiciled or doing business in their states.  To date, we have received inquiries from the Pennsylvania and North Carolina Insurance Departments concerning our business relationships with brokers, as did most or all other insurance companies doing business in these jurisdictions. We have responded fully to these inquiries and believe that our contractual relationships and business practices with agents and brokers are in compliance with all applicable statutes and regulations. The outcome of these investigations into broker compensation and placement practices and the impact of any future regulatory changes governing agent and broker commissions is uncertain.

The Securities and Exchange Commission, New York Attorney General and certain other state regulators have initiated investigations of certain insurance and reinsurance companies concerning policies of finite reinsurance issued by such insurers and reinsurers. To date, we have not received any inquiries or other requests for information in connection with these investigations. The outcome of these investigations is uncertain.

Comparison of SAP and GAAP Results

Results presented in accordance with GAAP vary in certain respects from results presented in accordance with statutory accounting practices prescribed or permitted by the Pennsylvania Insurance Department (“SAP”). Prescribed SAP includes state laws, regulations and general administrative rules, as well as a variety of National Association of Insurance
 

26

 
Commissioners publications. Permitted SAP encompasses all accounting practices that are not prescribed. Our domestic insurance subsidiaries use SAP to prepare various financial reports for use by insurance regulators.
 
Recent Accounting Pronouncements

In March 2004, the Emerging Issues Task Force (“EITF”) reached a consensus regarding EITF 03-1, “The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its Application to Certain Investments.” The consensus provides guidance for evaluating whether an investment is other-than-temporarily impaired. We have applied the disclosure provisions of EITF 03-1 to its consolidated financial statements. In September 2004, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued Staff Position (“FSP”) EITF 03-1-1, which delayed the effective date of the application of the recognition and measurement provisions of EITF 03-1. In the third quarter of 2005, the FASB decided not to provide additional guidance on the meaning of other-than-temporary impairment and directed its staff to finalize proposed FASB Staff Position (FSP) EITF 03-1-a, “Implementation Guidance for the Application of Paragraph 16 of EITF Issue No. 03-1.” The final FSP, retitled as FSP FAS 115-1, “The Meaning of Other-Than-Temporary Impairment and Its Application to Certain Investments” will be finalized in the fourth quarter of 2005 and will be subject to adoption for reporting periods beginning after December 15, 2005. We do not believe that the adoption of this guidance will have a material impact on our financial condition or results of operations.

In December 2004, the FASB revised Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 123, “Share-Based Payment,” to require the recognition of expenses relating to share-based payment transactions, including employee stock option grants, based on the fair value of the equity instruments issued. We are required to adopt the revised SFAS No. 123 in the first quarter of 2006. Effective with the first quarter of 2006, we will recognize an expense over the required service period for any stock options granted, modified, cancelled, or repurchased after that date and for the portion of grants for which the requisite service has not yet been rendered, based on the grant-date fair value of those awards. See Note 2-B for the effect on net income (loss) if the fair value based method had been applied.

Critical Accounting Estimates

Our critical accounting estimates can be found beginning on page 55 of our 2004 Form 10-K.

27


CAUTIONARY STATEMENTS

Except for historical information provided in Management’s Discussion and Analysis and otherwise in this report, statements made throughout, are forward-looking and contain information about financial results, economic conditions, trends and known uncertainties. Words such as “believe,” “estimate,” “anticipate,” “expect” or similar words are intended to identify forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements are based on currently available financial, competitive and economic data and our current operating plans based on assumptions regarding future events. Our actual results could differ materially from those expected by our management.

The factors that could cause actual results to vary materially, some of which are described with the forward-looking statements, include, but are not limited to:

 
·
our ability to effect an efficient withdrawal from the reinsurance business, including the commutation of reinsurance business with certain large ceding companies, without incurring any significant additional liabilities;
 
·
adverse property and casualty loss development for events that we insured in prior years, including unforeseen increases in medical costs and changing judicial interpretations of available coverage for certain insured losses.
 
·
our ability to have sufficient cash at the holding company to meet our debt service and other obligations, including any restrictions such as those imposed by the Pennsylvania Insurance Department on receiving dividends from our insurance subsidiaries in an amount sufficient to meet such obligations;
 
·
our ability to increase the amount of new and renewal business written by The PMA Insurance Group at adequate prices;
 
·
any future lowering or loss of one or more of our financial strength and debt ratings, and the adverse impact that any such downgrade may have on our ability to compete and to raise capital, and our liquidity and financial condition;
 
·
adequacy and collectibility of reinsurance that we purchased;
 
·
adequacy of reserves for claim liabilities;
 
·
the uncertain nature of damage theories and loss amounts and the development of additional facts related to the attack on the World Trade Center;
 
·
regulatory changes in risk-based capital or other regulatory standards that affect the cost of, or demand for, our products or otherwise affect our ability to conduct business, including any future action with respect to our business taken by the Pennsylvania Insurance Department or any other state insurance department;
 
·
the impact of future results on the recoverability of our deferred tax asset;
 
·
the outcome of any litigation against us, including the outcome of the purported class action lawsuits;
 
·
competitive conditions that may affect the level of rate adequacy related to the amount of risk undertaken and that may influence the sustainability of adequate rate changes;
 
·
ability to implement and maintain rate increases;
 
·
the effect of changes in workers’ compensation statutes and their administration, which may affect the rates that we can charge and the manner in which we administer claims;
 
·
our ability to predict and effectively manage claims related to insurance and reinsurance policies;
 
·
uncertainty as to the price and availability of reinsurance on business we intend to write in the future, including reinsurance for terrorist acts;
 
·
severity of natural disasters and other catastrophes, including the impact of future acts of terrorism, in connection with insurance and reinsurance policies;
 
·
changes in general economic conditions, including the performance of financial markets, interest rates and the level of unemployment;
 
·
uncertainties related to possible terrorist activities or international hostilities and whether TRIA is extended beyond its December 31, 2005 termination date; and
 
·
other factors or uncertainties disclosed from time to time in our filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission.

You should not place undue reliance on any such forward-looking statements. Unless otherwise stated, we disclaim any current intention to update forward-looking information and to release publicly the results of any future revisions we may make to forward-looking statements to reflect events or circumstances after the date hereof or to reflect the occurrence of unanticipated events.

28

Item 3. Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure About Market Risk

There has been no material change regarding our market risk position from the information provided under the caption “Market Risk of Financial Instruments” beginning on page 60 of our 2004 Form 10-K.

Item 4. Controls and Procedures

As of the end of the period covered by this report, we, under the supervision and with the participation of our management, including our President and Chief Executive Officer, and our Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer, carried out an evaluation of the effectiveness of our disclosure controls and procedures as defined in Rule 13a-15(e) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended. Based upon that evaluation, the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures are effective in timely alerting them to material information relating to us (including our consolidated subsidiaries) required to be disclosed in our periodic filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission. During the period covered by this report, there were no changes in our internal control over financial reporting that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting.

 
Item 1. Legal Proceedings

In Re PMA Capital Corporation Securities Litigation
 
By Order dated July 27, 2005, the District Court partially granted our previously filed Motion to Dismiss the Amended Complaint, dismissing all allegations with respect to the PMA Insurance Group, and otherwise denied the Motion to Dismiss.
 
Item 2. Unregistered Sales of Equity Securities and Use of Proceeds

Issuer Purchase of Equity Securities
 

Period
 
Total Number of
Shares Purchased
 
Average Price
Paid per Share
 
Total Number of Shares Purchased as Part of Publicly Announced Plans or Programs
 
Maximum Number of Shares that May yet be Purchased Under
Publicly Announced
Plans or Programs
 
7/1/05-7/31/05
   
-
   
-
   
-
   
-
 
8/1/05-8/31/05
   
-
   
-
   
-
   
-
 
9/1/05-9/30/05
   
283,175(1)
$
17.163
   
-
   
-
 
Total
   
283,175
 
$
17.163
             
                           
                           

 
(1)
Transactions represent the purchase in the open market of a portion of our outstanding 6.50% Convertible Debt. The average price paid per share is calculated by dividing the total cash paid for the debt by the number of shares of Class A common stock into which the debt is currently convertible.
 
Item 6. Exhibits

The Exhibits are listed in the Exhibit Index on page 31.

29



Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the Company has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.


 
PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION
   
Date: November 8, 2005
By:/s/ William E. Hitselberger
 
William E. Hitselberger
 
Executive Vice President
 
and Chief Financial Officer
 
(Principal Financial Officer)



30




Exhibit No.
Description of Exhibit
 
Method of Filing
(4)
Instruments defining the rights of security holders, including indentures*     
 
Filed herewith
       
(10)          Material Contracts;     
       
 
Filed herewith
 
Filed herewith
 
Filed herewith
 
Filed herewith
 
Filed herewith
 
       
 
Filed herewith
       
(31)
Rule 13a - 14(a)/15d - 14 (a) Certificates
   
       
 
Filed herewith
       
 
Filed herewith
       
(32)
Section 1350 Certificates
   
       
 
Filed herewith
       
 
Filed herewith
       
       
*The registrant will furnish to the Commission, upon request, a copy of any of the registrant’s agreements with respect to its long-term debt not otherwise filed with the Commission.
 
31



 
EX-4.1 2 ex4-1.htm EXHIBIT 4.1 Exhibit 4.1
Exhibit 4.1
 
INDENTURE
 
 
Between
 
 
PENNSYLVANIA MANUFACTURERS’ ASSOCIATION INSURANCE COMPANY
 
 
AND
 
 
JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
 
AS TRUSTEE
 
 
 
Dated as of September 29, 2005
 
 
 
FLOATING RATE SURPLUS NOTES DUE 2035
 
 

Table of Contents
  
     
ARTICLE I DEFINITIONS 
1
SECTION 1.01
Definitions.
1
ARTICLE II SECURITIES 
7
SECTION 2.01
Principal Amount; Maturity.
7
SECTION 2.02
Form of Surplus Notes.
7
SECTION 2.03
Form of Trustee’s Certificate of Authentication.
8
SECTION 2.04
Authentication and Dating.
8
SECTION 2.05
Date and Denomination of Surplus Notes.
8
SECTION 2.06
Execution of Surplus Notes.
10
SECTION 2.07
Exchange and Registration of Transfer of Surplus Notes.
11
SECTION 2.08
Mutilated, Destroyed, Lost or Stolen Surplus Notes.
14
SECTION 2.09
Temporary Surplus Notes.
15
SECTION 2.10
Cancellation of Surplus Notes Paid, etc.
15
SECTION 2.11
Interest.
16
SECTION 2.12
Regulatory Interest Limitations and Adjustments.
16
SECTION 2.13
CUSIP Number.
17
ARTICLE III PARTICULAR COVENANTS OF THE COMPANY 
17
SECTION 3.01
Payment of Principal, Premium, if any, and Interest.
17
SECTION 3.02
Payment Restrictions.
18
SECTION 3.03
Offices for Notices and Payments, etc.
19
SECTION 3.04
Appointments to Fill Vacancies in Trustee’s Office.
19
SECTION 3.05
Provisions as to Paying Agent.
19
SECTION 3.06
Certificate to Trustee.
20
 

SECTION 3.07
Compliance with Consolidation Provisions.
20
SECTION 3.08
Limitations on Dividends; Etc.
21
SECTION 3.09
Notice of Default.
21
ARTICLE IV SECURITYHOLDERS’ LISTS AND REPORTS BY THE COMPANY AND THE TRUSTEE 
21
SECTION 4.01
Securityholders’ Lists.
21
SECTION 4.02
Preservation and Disclosure of Lists.
21
SECTION 4.03
Reports by Company.
23
ARTICLE V REMEDIES OF THE TRUSTEE AND SECURITYHOLDERS ON EVENT OF DEFAULT 
24
SECTION 5.01
Events of Default.
24
SECTION 5.02
Payment of Surplus Notes on Default; Suit Therefor.
25
SECTION 5.03
Application of Moneys Collected by Trustee.
27
SECTION 5.04
Proceedings by Securityholders.
27
SECTION 5.05
Proceedings by Trustee.
28
SECTION 5.06
Remedies Cumulative and Continuing.
28
SECTION 5.07
Direction of Proceedings and Waiver of Defaults by Majority of Securityholders.
29
SECTION 5.08
Notice of Defaults.
29
SECTION 5.09
Undertaking to Pay Costs.
30
SECTION 5.10
Delay or Omission Not Waiver.
30
ARTICLE VI CONCERNING THE TRUSTEE 
30
SECTION 6.01
Duties and Responsibilities of Trustee.
30
SECTION 6.02
Reliance on Documents, Opinions, etc.
31
SECTION 6.03
No Responsibility for Recitals, etc.
33
SECTION 6.04
Trustee, Authenticating Agent, Paying Agents, Transfer Agents or Registrar May Own Surplus Notes.
33
 

SECTION 6.05
Moneys to be Held in Trust.
33
SECTION 6.06
Compensation and Expenses of Trustee.
34
SECTION 6.07
Officers’ Certificate as Evidence.
34
SECTION 6.08
Conflicting Interest of Trustee.
34
SECTION 6.09
Eligibility of Trustee.
35
SECTION 6.10
Resignation or Removal of Trustee.
35
SECTION 6.11
Acceptance by Successor Trustee.
36
SECTION 6.12
Succession by Merger, etc.
37
SECTION 6.13
Authenticating Agents.
37
ARTICLE VII CONCERNING THE SECURITYHOLDERS 
38
SECTION 7.01
Action by Securityholders.
38
SECTION 7.02
Proof of Execution by Securityholders.
39
SECTION 7.03
Who Are Deemed Absolute Owners.
39
SECTION 7.04
Surplus Notes Owned by Company Deemed Not Outstanding.
39
SECTION 7.05
Revocation of Consents; Future Holders Bound.
40
ARTICLE VIII SECURITYHOLDERS’ MEETINGS 
40
SECTION 8.01
Purposes of Meetings.
40
SECTION 8.02
Call of Meetings by Trustee.
41
SECTION 8.03
Call of Meetings by Company or Securityholders.
41
SECTION 8.04
Qualifications for Voting.
41
SECTION 8.05
Regulations.
41
SECTION 8.06
Voting.
42
ARTICLE IX SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURES 
43
SECTION 9.01
Supplemental Indentures without Consent of Securityholders.
43
SECTION 9.02
Supplemental Indentures with Consent of Securityholders.
44
 

SECTION 9.03
Notation on Surplus Notes.
45
SECTION 9.04
Evidence of Compliance of Supplemental Indenture to be Furnished to Trustee.
45
ARTICLE X CONSOLIDATION, MERGER, SALE, CONVEYANCE AND LEASE 
45
SECTION 10.01
Company May Consolidate, etc., on Certain Terms.
45
SECTION 10.02
Successor Entity to be Substituted for Company.
46
SECTION 10.03
Opinion of Counsel to be Given to Trustee.
46
ARTICLE XI SATISFACTION AND DISCHARGE OF INDENTURE 
47
SECTION 11.01
Discharge of Indenture.
47
SECTION 11.02
Deposited Moneys to be Held in Trust by Trustee.
47
SECTION 11.03
Paying Agent to Repay Moneys Held.
48
SECTION 11.04
Return of Unclaimed Moneys.
48
ARTICLE XII IMMUNITY OF INCORPORATORS, STOCKHOLDERS, MEMBERS, PARTNERS, OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS 
48
SECTION 12.01
Indenture and Surplus Notes Solely Entity Obligations.
48
ARTICLE XIII MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 
48
SECTION 13.01
Successors.
48
SECTION 13.02
Official Acts by Successor Entity.
48
SECTION 13.03
Surrender of Company Powers.
49
SECTION 13.04
Addresses for Notices, etc.
49
SECTION 13.05
Governing Law.
49
SECTION 13.06
Submission to Jurisdiction.
49
SECTION 13.07
Evidence of Compliance with Conditions Precedent.
49
SECTION 13.08
Table of Contents, Headings, etc.
50
SECTION 13.09
Execution in Counterparts.
50
SECTION 13.10
Separability.
50
 

ARTICLE XIV REDEMPTION OF SECURITIES 
50
SECTION 14.01
Optional Redemption.
50
SECTION 14.02
Notice of Redemption; Selection of Surplus Notes.
51
SECTION 14.03
Payment of Surplus Notes Called for Redemption.
52
ARTICLE XV SUBORDINATION OF SECURITIES 
52
SECTION 15.01
Agreement to Subordinate.
52
SECTION 15.02
Default on Senior Indebtedness.
53
SECTION 15.03
Liquidation; Dissolution; Rehabilitation, Conservation.
53
SECTION 15.04
Subrogation of Securityholders.
55
SECTION 15.05
Notice by the Company.
56
SECTION 15.06
Rights of the Trustee; Holders of Senior Indebtedness.
56
SECTION 15.07
Subordination May Not Be Impaired.
57
 
Exhibit A
Form of Surplus Note
Exhibit B
Form of Quarterly Financial Report

 






THIS INDENTURE, dated as of September 29, 2005, between Pennsylvania Manufacturers’ Association Insurance Company, a Pennsylvania insurance company (hereinafter sometimes called the “Company”), and JPMorgan Chase Bank, National Association, as trustee (hereinafter sometimes called the “Trustee”).
 
W I T N E S S E T H :
 
WHEREAS, for its lawful corporate purposes, the Company has duly authorized the issuance of its Floating Rate Surplus Notes due 2035 (the “Surplus Notes”) in the aggregate principal amount of $10,000,000 and, to provide the terms and conditions upon which the Surplus Notes are to be authenticated, issued and delivered, the Company has duly authorized the execution, delivery and performance of this Indenture; and
 
WHEREAS, all acts and things necessary to make this Indenture a valid and legally binding agreement according to its terms, have been done and performed;
 
NOW, THEREFORE, This Indenture Witnesseth:
 
In consideration of the premises, and the purchase of the Surplus Notes by the Securityholders (as defined below) thereof, the Company and the Trustee mutually covenant and agree for the benefit of the respective Securityholders from time to time, as follows:
 
ARTICLE I
DEFINITIONS
 
SECTION 1.01 Definitions.
 
The terms defined in this Section 1.01 (except as herein otherwise expressly provided or unless the context otherwise requires) for all purposes of this Indenture and any indenture supplemental hereto shall have the respective meanings specified in this Section 1.01. All accounting terms used but not expressly defined herein shall have the meanings assigned to such terms in accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States, and the term “generally accepted accounting principles” means such accounting principles as are generally accepted in the United States at the time of any computation. Notwithstanding the foregoing, to the extent applicable to the Company, all accounting terms used herein and not expressly defined shall have the meanings assigned to such terms in accordance with statutory accounting principles, and the term “statutory accounting principles” means such accounting principles as are prescribed or permitted by Applicable Insurance Laws or the Applicable Regulatory Authority at the time of any computation. The words “herein”, “hereof” and “hereunder” and other words of similar import refer to this Indenture as a whole and not to any particular Article, Section or other subdivision. Any reference to the singular includes the plural and vice versa (unless the context otherwise requires).
 
“Affiliate” means, with respect to a specified Person, (a) any Person directly or indirectly owning, controlling or holding with power to vote, 10% or more of the outstanding Voting Securities or other ownership interests of the specified Person, (b) any Person 10% or more of whose outstanding Voting Securities or other ownership interests are directly or indirectly owned, controlled or held with power to vote by the specified Person, (c) any Person directly or indirectly controlling, controlled by, or under common control with the specified Person, (d) a partnership in which the specified Person is a general partner, (e) any officer or director of the specified Person, and (f) if the specified Person is an individual, any entity of which the specified Person is an officer, director or general partner.
 
1

“Applicable Insurance Laws” means (a) the insurance code and statutes of the Company’s state of domicile, (b) all published regulations, bulletins and rulings thereunder, and (c) that certain approval letter of the Applicable Regulatory Authority dated September 22, 2005 authorizing the initial issuance by the Company of a Surplus Note hereunder.
 
“Applicable Regulatory Authority” means the Insurance Commissioner of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania or such other insurance regulatory authority of the state of domicile of the Company.
 
“Authenticating Agent” means any agent or agents of the Trustee which at the time shall be appointed and acting pursuant to Section 6.13.
 
“Available Amount” means the funds and other assets of the Company legally available to make payments with respect to the Surplus Notes under the Applicable Insurance Laws, in order for the outstanding principal under such Surplus Notes to constitute part of the Company’s policyholders’ surplus in accordance with statutory accounting principles, applied on a consistent basis throughout the periods involved.
 
“Board of Directors” means the Board of Directors or any other duly authorized committee thereof of the Company.
 
“Board Resolution” means a copy of a resolution certified by the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary of the Company to have been duly adopted by the Board of Directors and to be in full force and effect on the date of such certification.
 
“Business Day” means any day other than a Saturday, Sunday or other day on which commercial banking institutions in The City of New York or Houston, Texas are authorized or obligated by law, executive order or regulation to close.
 
“Calculation Agent” means the Trustee.
 
“Certificate of Authentication” means the certificate issued by the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent authenticating a Surplus Note issued under the Indenture.
 
“CSFB” means Credit Suisse, a Swiss bank acting through its Cayman Islands branch.
 
“Code” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.07.
 
“Commission” means the Securities and Exchange Commission, as from time to time constituted, created under the Exchange Act, or, if at any time after the execution of this Indenture such Commission is not existing and performing the duties now assigned to it under the Trust Indenture Act, then the body performing such duties at such time.
 
2

“Company” means Pennsylvania Manufacturers’ Association Insurance Company, a Pennsylvania insurance company, and, subject to the provisions of Article X hereof, shall include its successors and assigns.
 
“Conversion” has the meaning set forth in Section 10.01.
 
“Default” means any event, act or condition that, with notice or lapse of time, or both, would constitute an Event of Default.
 
“Defaulted Interest” means any overdue installment of interest other than an installment of interest that is not made when due as a result of a Payment Restriction.
 
“Determination Date” means two London Banking Days next preceding the applicable Interest Payment Date.
 
“Event of Default” means any event, act or condition specified in Section 5.01, continued for the period of time, if any, and after the giving of the notice, if any, therein designated.
 
“Excess Interest” means the cumulative amount of interest on a Surplus Note, if any, that is not paid as a result of any Regulatory Interest Limitation, minus the amount of interest paid on such Surplus Note as a result of adjustments to the Interest Rate to account for Excess Interest in accordance with Section 2.12.
 
“Exchange Act” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended.
 
“Indenture” means this instrument as originally executed or, if amended or supplemented as herein provided, as so amended or supplemented, or both.
 
“Insolvency Law” means the provisions of the insurance insolvency, rehabilitation and liquidation statutes of the Company’s state of domicile and all published regulations, bulletins and rulings thereunder.
 
“Interest Payment Date” has the meaning set forth in Section 2.11(a).
 
“Interest Payment Period” means the period from and including an Interest Payment Date, or in the case of the first Interest Payment Period, the original date of issuance of the Surplus Notes, to, but excluding the next succeeding Interest Payment Date or, in the case of the last Interest Payment Period, the Stated Maturity or date of redemption.
 
“Interest Rate” means a per annum rate of interest equal to LIBOR, as determined on the Determination Date for such Interest Payment Period, plus 4.50% (provided, in each case, that the Interest Rate for any Interest Payment Period may not exceed the highest rate permitted by Pennsylvania law, as the same may be modified by United States law of general applicability). The Interest Rate for any Interest Payment Period shall be subject to the limitations and adjustments set forth in Section 2.12 hereof.
 
“I-TRUPS” means Principal I-TRUPS CDO I, a limited liability company formed or to be formed pursuant to the laws of the Cayman Islands.
 
3

“LIBOR” means, with respect to any Interest Payment Period (in the following order of priority):
 
(a) the rate (expressed as a percentage per annum) for Eurodollar deposits having a three-month maturity that appears on Telerate page 3750 as of 11:00 a.m. (London time) on the Determination Date;
 
(b) if such rate does not appear on Telerate page 3750 as of 11:00 a.m. (London time) on the Determination Date, the Calculation Agent will request the principal London offices of four leading banks in the London interbank market as selected by the Calculation Agent to provide such banks’ offered quotations (expressed as percentages per annum) to prime banks in the London interbank market for Eurodollar deposits having a three-month maturity as of 11:00 a.m. (London time) on such Determination Date, and if at least two quotations are provided, LIBOR will be the arithmetic mean of such quotations;
 
(c) if fewer than two such quotations are provided as requested in clause (b) above, the Calculation Agent will request four major New York City banks selected by the Calculation Agent to provide such banks’ offered quotations (expressed as percentages per annum) to leading European banks for loans in Eurodollars as of 11:00 a.m. (New York City time) on such Determination Date, and if at least two quotations are provided, LIBOR will be the arithmetic mean of such quotations, and
 
(d) if fewer than two such quotations are provided as requested in clause (c) above, LIBOR will be LIBOR as in effect during the preceding Interest Payment Period.
 
“London Banking Day” means any day, other than a Saturday or Sunday, on which banks are open for business (including dealings in deposits in U.S. dollars) in London.
 
“Officers’ Certificate” means a certificate signed by the Chairman of the Board (if an executive officer), the President or any Vice President, and by the Treasurer, an Assistant Treasurer, the Controller, an Assistant Controller, the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary of the Company and delivered to the Trustee. Each such certificate shall include the statements provided for in Section 13.07 if and to the extent provided by the provisions of such Section.
 
“Opinion of Counsel” means an opinion signed by legal counsel experienced in the matters as to which such opinion is being delivered, who may be an employee of or counsel to the Company, or may be other counsel satisfactory to the Trustee. Each such opinion shall include the statements provided for in Section 13.07 if and to the extent required by the provisions of such Section.
 
The term “outstanding” (except as otherwise provided in Section 7.01), when used with reference to Surplus Notes, means, subject to the provisions of Section 7.04, as of any particular time, all Surplus Notes authenticated and delivered by the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent under this Indenture, except
 
(a) Surplus Notes theretofore cancelled by the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent or delivered to the Trustee for cancellation;
 
4

(b) Surplus Notes, or portions thereof, for the payment or redemption of which moneys in the necessary amount shall have been deposited in trust with the Trustee or with any paying agent (other than the Company) or shall have been set aside and segregated in trust by the Company (if the Company shall act as its own paying agent); provided that, if such Surplus Notes, or portions thereof, are to be redeemed prior to maturity thereof, notice of such redemption shall have been given in accordance with Article XIV or provision satisfactory to the Trustee shall have been made for giving such notice; and
 
(c) Surplus Notes paid pursuant to Section 2.08 or Surplus Notes in lieu of or in substitution for which other Surplus Notes shall have been authenticated and delivered pursuant to the terms of Section 2.08 unless proof satisfactory to the Company and the Trustee is presented that any such Surplus Notes are held by bona fide holders in due course.
 
“Payment Restriction” has the meaning set forth in Section 3.02.
 
“Person” means any individual, corporation, partnership, limited liability company, joint venture, association, joint-stock company, trust, unincorporated organization or government or any agency or political subdivision thereof.
 
“Predecessor Surplus Note” of any particular Surplus Note means every previous Surplus Note evidencing all or a portion of the same debt and as that evidenced by such particular Surplus Note; and, for the purposes of this definition, any Surplus Note authenticated and delivered under Section 2.08 in lieu of a lost, destroyed or stolen Surplus Note shall be deemed to evidence the same debt as the lost, destroyed or stolen Surplus Note.
 
“Principal Office of the Trustee”, or other similar term, means the principal office of the Trustee at which, at any particular time, its corporate trust business is administered.
 
“Redemption Price” has the meaning set forth in Section 14.01.
 
“Regulatory Interest Limitation” means any cap or other limitation on the rate or amount of interest that may be paid on the Surplus Notes pursuant to Applicable Insurance Laws or any order or approval letter relating to the initial issuance by the Company of a Surplus Note hereunder.
 
“Resale Restriction Termination Date” means, with respect to any Surplus Note, the date which is the later of (i) two years (or such shorter period of time as permitted by Rule 144(k) under the Securities Act) after the later of (y) the date of original issuance of such Surplus Note and (z) the last date on which the Company or any Affiliate (as defined in Rule 405 under the Securities Act) of the Company was the holder of such Surplus Note (or any predecessor thereto) and (ii) such later date, if any, as may be required by any subsequent change in applicable law.
 
“Responsible Officer” means, with respect to the Trustee, any officer within the corporate trust department of the Trustee, including any vice president, any assistant vice president, any assistant secretary, any assistant treasurer, any financial services officer or other officer or agent of the corporate trust department of the Trustee customarily performing functions similar to those performed by any of the above designated officers or agents and also means, with respect to a particular corporate trust matter, any other officer or agent to whom such matter is referred because of that officer’s or agent’s knowledge of and familiarity with the particular subject.
 
5

“Securities Act” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended from time to time, or any successor legislation.
 
“Securityholder”, “Holder of Surplus Notes”, or other similar terms, means any person in whose name at the time a Surplus Note is registered in the Surplus Note Register.
 
“Senior Claim Holders” has the meaning set forth in Section 15.04.
 
“Senior Claims” means all existing or future claims (including, without limitation, policyholder claims and claimant and beneficiary claims) that, pursuant to the Insolvency Laws, are senior to and would be paid prior to the Surplus Notes in the event of rehabilitation, liquidation, conservation, dissolution, reorganization or supervision of the Company.
 
“Senior Indebtedness” means, with respect to the Company, (i) the principal, premium, if any, and interest in respect of (x) indebtedness of the Company for money borrowed and (y) indebtedness evidenced by securities, debentures, notes, bonds or other similar instruments issued by the Company, (ii) all capital lease obligations of the Company, (iii) all obligations of the Company issued or assumed as the deferred purchase price of property, all conditional sale obligations of the Company and all obligations of the Company under any title retention agreement, (iv) all obligations of the Company for the reimbursement of any letter of credit, any banker’s acceptance, any security purchase facility, any repurchase agreement or similar arrangement, any interest rate swap, any other hedging arrangement, any obligation under options or any similar credit or other transaction, (v) all obligations of the type referred to in clauses (i) through (iv) above of other Persons for the payment of which the Company is responsible or liable as obligor, guarantor or otherwise, and (vi) all obligations of the type referred to in clauses (i) through (v) above of other Persons secured by any lien on any property or asset of the Company (whether or not such obligation is assumed by the Company), whether incurred on or prior to the date of this Indenture or thereafter incurred, unless it is provided in the instrument creating or evidencing the same or pursuant to which the same is outstanding that such obligations are not superior or are pari passu in right of payment to the Surplus Notes.
 
“Stated Maturity” means the date on which the Surplus Notes mature and on which the principal shall be due and payable, together with all accrued and unpaid interest, if any, thereon, which date shall be November 2, 2035, unless accelerated to an earlier date as provided in Article XIV.
 
“Subsidiary” means with respect to any Person, (i) any corporation a majority of the outstanding Voting Securities of which are owned, directly or indirectly, by such Person or by one or more of its Subsidiaries, or by such Person and one or more of its Subsidiaries, (ii) any general partnership, joint venture or similar entity a majority of whose outstanding partnership or similar ownership interests shall at the time be owned by such Person, or by one or more of its Subsidiaries, or by such Person and one or more of its Subsidiaries and (iii) any limited partnership of which such Person or any of its Subsidiaries is a general partner.
 
6

“Surplus Note” or “Surplus Notes” shall have the meaning stated in the first recital of this Indenture and, more particularly, means the surplus notes authenticated and delivered under this Indenture.
 
“Surplus Note Register” shall have the meaning given to such term in Section 2.07.
 
“Tax Event” means that the Company shall have received an opinion of a nationally recognized independent tax counsel experienced in such matters to the effect that, as a result of (a) any amendment to, or change (including any announced prospective change) in, the laws or any regulations thereunder of the United States or any political subdivision or taxing authority thereof or therein, or (b) any official administrative pronouncement or judicial decision interpreting or applying such laws or regulations, which amendment or change is effective or which pronouncement or decision is announced on or after the date of the original issuance of the Surplus Notes, there is more than an insubstantial risk that, if the Company is organized and existing under the laws of the United States or any state thereof or the District of Columbia, interest payable by the Company on the Surplus Notes is not, or within 90 days of the date of such opinion will not be, deductible by the Company, in whole or in part, for United States federal income tax purposes.
 
“Trust Indenture Act” means the Trust Indenture Act of 1939, as amended.
 
“Trustee” means the Person identified as "Trustee" in the first paragraph hereof, and, subject to the provisions of Article VI hereof, shall also include its successors and assigns as Trustee hereunder.
 
“Unpaid Interest” shall have the meaning set forth in Section 2.05.
 
“Voting Securities” mean shares, interests, participations or other equivalents in the equity (however designated) in such Person having ordinary voting power for the election of a majority of the directors (or their equivalent) of such Person, other than shares, interests, participations or other equivalents having such power only by reason of the occurrence of a contingency.
 
ARTICLE II
SECURITIES
 
SECTION 2.01 Principal Amount; Maturity.
 
The Company may issue up to $10,000,000 aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Notes. The Surplus Notes shall mature on November 2, 2035; provided that the Company may redeem the Surplus Notes prior to their Stated Maturity in accordance with Article XIV.
 
 
The Surplus Notes shall be substantially in the form of Exhibit A hereto. Definitive Surplus Notes shall be typed, printed, lithographed or engraved on steel engraved borders or may be produced in any other manner, all as determined by the officers of the Company executing such Surplus Notes, as conclusively evidenced by their execution of such Surplus Notes. The Surplus Notes shall be issued in registered form only. Principal of, premium, if any, and interest on the Surplus Notes issued in registered form will be payable, the transfer of such Surplus Notes will be registrable and such Surplus Notes will be exchangeable for Surplus Notes bearing identical terms and provisions at the office or agency of the Trustee in Houston, Texas; provided, however, that payment of interest on an Interest Payment Date may be made at the option of the Company by check mailed to the Holder entitled thereto at such address as shall appear in the Surplus Note Register or by wire transfer to an account appropriately designated by the Holder entitled thereto, while payments due at Stated Maturity or earlier redemption will be made by the Company in same-day funds against presentation and surrender of the related Surplus Notes. Notwithstanding the foregoing, so long as the Holder of any Surplus Notes is CSFB, I-TRUPS or a trustee for I-TRUPS, the payment of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on such Surplus Notes held by such Holder will be made by the Company in same-day funds at such place and to such account as may be designated by such Holder.
 
7

SECTION 2.03 Form of Trustee’s Certificate of Authentication.
 
The Trustee’s Certificate of Authentication on all Surplus Notes shall be in substantially the following form:
 
This is one of the Surplus Notes referred to in the within-mentioned Indenture.
 
JPMorgan Chase Bank, National Association
as Trustee
 
By:______________________________
 
Authorized Signatory
 
Dated:
 
SECTION 2.04 Authentication and Dating.
 
At any time and from time to time after the execution and delivery of this Indenture, the Company may deliver Surplus Notes not in excess of $10,000,000 to the Trustee for authentication, and the Trustee shall thereupon authenticate and deliver said Surplus Notes to or upon the written order of the Company, signed by its Chairman of the Board of Directors (if an executive officer), President or one of its Vice Presidents and by its Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, Secretary or any Assistant Secretary, without any further action by the Company hereunder. In authenticating such Surplus Notes, and accepting the additional responsibilities under this Indenture in relation to such Surplus Notes, the Trustee shall be entitled to receive, and (subject to Section 6.01) shall be fully protected in relying upon, a copy of any Board Resolution or Resolutions relating thereto and, if applicable, an appropriate record of any action taken pursuant to such resolution, in each case certified by the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary of the Company.
 
SECTION 2.05 Date and Denomination of Surplus Notes.
 
The Surplus Notes shall be issuable in fully registered form without coupons and in minimum denominations of $100,000 and any integral multiple of $1,000 in excess thereof. The Surplus Notes shall be numbered, lettered, or otherwise distinguished in such manner or in accordance with such plans as the officers of the Company executing the same may determine with the approval of the Trustee, as conclusively evidenced by the execution and authentication thereof.
 
8

Every Surplus Note shall be dated the date of its authentication and shall bear interest, if any, from such date. The interest installment on any Surplus Note that is payable, and is punctually paid or duly provided for, on any Interest Payment Date shall be paid to the Person in whose name said Surplus Note (or one or more Predecessor Surplus Notes) is registered at the close of business on the regular record date for such interest installment. In the event that any Surplus Note or portion thereof is called for redemption and the redemption date (i) falls after an Interest Payment Date, then interest on such Surplus Note payable on such Interest Payment Date shall be paid to the Holder on the related regular record date or (ii) is subsequent to a regular record date with respect to any Interest Payment Date and prior to such Interest Payment Date, then interest on such Surplus Note payable on such redemption date shall be paid upon presentation and surrender of such Surplus Note as provided in Section 3.01.
 
Any Defaulted Interest and any installment of interest that is not paid when due as a result of a Payment Restriction (“Unpaid Interest”) shall forthwith cease to be payable to the Holder on the relevant regular record date by virtue of having been such Holder, and such Unpaid Interest shall be paid by the Company, at its election, as provided in clause (a) or clause (b) below:
 
(a) The Company may make payment of any Unpaid Interest on Surplus Notes to the Persons in whose names such Surplus Notes (or their respective Predecessor Surplus Notes) are registered at the close of business on a special record date for the payment of such Unpaid Interest, which shall be fixed in the following manner: the Company shall notify the Trustee in writing of the amount of Unpaid Interest proposed to be paid on each such Surplus Note and the date of the proposed payment, and at the same time the Company shall deposit with the Trustee an amount of money equal to the aggregate amount proposed to be paid in respect of such Unpaid Interest or shall make arrangements satisfactory to the Trustee for such deposit prior to the date of the proposed payment, such money when deposited to be held in trust for the benefit of the Persons entitled to such Unpaid Interest as in this clause provided. Thereupon the Trustee shall fix a special record date for the payment of such Unpaid Interest which shall not be more than 15 nor less than 10 days prior to the date of the proposed payment and not less than 10 days after the receipt by the Trustee of the notice of the proposed payment. The Trustee shall promptly notify the Company of such special record date and, in the name and at the expense of the Company, shall cause notice of the proposed payment of such Unpaid Interest and the special record date therefor to be mailed, first class postage prepaid, to each Securityholder at his or her address as it appears in the Surplus Note Register, not less than 10 days prior to such special record date. Notice of the proposed payment of such Unpaid Interest and the special record date therefor having been mailed as aforesaid, such Unpaid Interest shall be paid to the Persons in whose names such Surplus Notes (or their respective Predecessor Surplus Notes) are registered on such special record date and shall be no longer payable pursuant to the following clause (b).
 
(b) The Company may make payment of any Unpaid Interest on any Surplus Notes in any other lawful manner not inconsistent with the requirements of any securities exchange on which such Surplus Notes may be listed, and upon such notice as may be required by such exchange, if, after notice given by the Company to the Trustee of the proposed payment pursuant to this clause, such manner of payment shall be deemed practicable by the Trustee.
 
9

The term “regular record date” means the fifteenth calendar day (whether or not a Business Day) preceding an Interest Payment Date.
 
Subject to the foregoing provisions of this Section, each Surplus Note delivered under this Indenture upon transfer of or in exchange for or in lieu of any other Surplus Note shall carry the rights to interest accrued and unpaid, and to accrue, that were carried by such other Surplus Note.
 
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth in this Indenture, any payment of interest on or principal and premium, if any, of the Surplus Notes may be made only subject to the Payment Restrictions. The Company covenants and agrees that it will (x) use its best efforts to obtain the approval of the Applicable Regulatory Authority to make payments of principal of or premium, if any, or interest on the Surplus Notes and (y) subject to the Payment Restrictions, duly and punctually pay or cause to be paid the principal of and premium, if any, and interest on such Surplus Notes at the place, at the respective times and in the manner provided in this Indenture and such Surplus Notes. To the extent that a payment of all or a portion of the principal of or premium, if any, or interest on a Surplus Note is prohibited by the Payment Restrictions, such prohibition shall not be considered to be a forgiveness of such payment, and interest shall continue to accrue on any such unpaid principal or premium, if any, at the rate provided in the Surplus Note, and promptly (and in no event later than thirty (30) days) after the removal of any such prohibition the Company shall make payment of all amounts (including unpaid interest) then past due and owing under the Surplus Note. FOR THE AVOIDANCE OF DOUBT, NO INTEREST SHALL ACCRUE OR BE PAYABLE ON ANY PAYMENT OF INTEREST THAT IS NOT MADE WHEN DUE AS A RESULT OF A PAYMENT RESTRICTION.
 
SECTION 2.06 Execution of Surplus Notes.
 
The Surplus Notes shall be signed in the name and on behalf of the Company by the manual or facsimile signature of its Chairman of the Board of Directors (if an executive officer), President or one of its Vice Presidents and by the manual or facsimile signature of its Treasurer, one of its Assistant Treasurers, Secretary or one of its Assistant Secretaries, by facsimile or otherwise, and which need not be attested. Only such Surplus Notes as shall bear thereon a Certificate of Authentication substantially in the form hereinbefore recited, executed by the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent, shall be entitled to the benefits of this Indenture or be valid or obligatory for any purpose. Such certificate by the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent upon any Surplus Note executed by the Company shall be conclusive evidence that the Surplus Note so authenticated has been duly authenticated and delivered hereunder and that the Holder is entitled to the benefits of this Indenture.
 
In case any officer of the Company who shall have signed any of the Surplus Notes shall cease to be such officer before the Surplus Notes so signed shall have been authenticated and delivered by the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent, or disposed of by the Company, such Surplus Notes nevertheless may be authenticated and delivered or disposed of as though the person who signed such Surplus Notes had not ceased to be such officer of the Company; and any Surplus Note may be signed on behalf of the Company by such persons as, at the actual date of the execution of such Surplus Note, shall be the proper officers of the Company, although at the date of the execution of this Indenture any such person was not such an officer.
 
10

SECTION 2.07 Exchange and Registration of Transfer of Surplus Notes.
 
Surplus Notes may be exchanged for a like aggregate principal amount of Surplus Notes of other authorized denominations. Surplus Notes to be exchanged may be surrendered at the Principal Office of the Trustee or at any office or agency to be maintained by the Company for such purpose as provided in Section 3.03, and the Company or the Trustee shall execute and register and the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent shall authenticate and deliver in exchange therefor the Surplus Note or Surplus Notes which the Securityholder making the exchange shall be entitled to receive. Upon due presentment for registration of transfer of any Surplus Note at the Principal Office of the Trustee or at any office or agency of the Company maintained for such purpose as provided in Section 3.03, the Company or the Trustee shall execute and register and the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent shall authenticate and deliver in the name of the transferee or transferees a new Surplus Note or Surplus Notes for a like aggregate principal amount. Registration or registration of transfer of any Surplus Note by the Trustee or by any agent of the Company appointed pursuant to Section 3.03, and delivery of such Surplus Note, shall be deemed to complete the registration or registration of transfer of such Surplus Note.
 
The Company or the Trustee shall keep, at the designated corporate trust office of the Trustee, a register for the Surplus Notes issued hereunder (the “Surplus Note Register”) in which, subject to such reasonable regulations as it may prescribe, the Company or the Trustee shall register ownership and transfer of ownership of all Surplus Notes and shall register the transfer of all Surplus Notes as in this Article II provided. The Surplus Note Register shall be in written form or in any other form capable of being converted into written form within a reasonable time.
 
All Surplus Notes presented for registration of transfer or for exchange shall (if so required by the Company, the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent) be duly endorsed, or be accompanied, by a written instrument or instruments of transfer in form satisfactory to the Company and either the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent duly executed by, the Holder of such Surplus Note or his attorney duly authorized in writing.
 
No service charge shall be made for any exchange or registration of transfer of Surplus Notes, but the Company or the Trustee may require payment of a sum sufficient to cover any tax or other governmental charge that may be imposed in connection therewith.
 
Neither the Company nor the Trustee shall be required to exchange or register a transfer of (a) any Surplus Note for a period of 15 days immediately preceding the date of mailing of a notice of redemption of Surplus Notes, or (b) any Surplus Notes selected, called or being called for redemption in whole or in part, except in the case of any Surplus Notes to be redeemed in part, the portion thereof not to be so redeemed.
 
11

Notwithstanding the foregoing, Surplus Notes may not be transferred prior to the Resale Restriction Termination Date except in compliance with the legend set forth below, unless otherwise determined by the Company in accordance with applicable law, which legend shall be placed on each Surplus Note:
 
THIS SECURITY IS A GLOBAL SECURITY AND IS REGISTERED IN THE NAME OF THE DEPOSITORY TRUST COMPANY (“DTC”) OR A NOMINEE OF DTC. THIS SECURITY IS EXCHANGEABLE FOR SECURITIES REGISTERED IN THE NAME OF A PERSON OTHER THAN DTC OR ITS NOMINEE ONLY IN THE LIMITED CIRCUMSTANCES DESCRIBED IN THE INDENTURE, AND NO TRANSFER OF THIS SECURITY (OTHER THAN A TRANSFER OF THIS SECURITY AS A WHOLE BY DTC TO A NOMINEE OF DTC OR BY A NOMINEE OF DTC TO DTC OR ANOTHER NOMINEE OF DTC) MAY BE REGISTERED EXCEPT IN LIMITED CIRCUMSTANCES.
 
THIS SECURITY HAS NOT BEEN REGISTERED UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933, AS AMENDED (THE “SECURITIES ACT”), OR ANY STATE SECURITIES LAWS OR ANY OTHER APPLICABLE SECURITIES LAWS. NEITHER THIS SECURITY NOR ANY INTEREST OR PARTICIPATION HEREIN MAY BE REOFFERED, SOLD, ASSIGNED, TRANSFERRED, PLEDGED, ENCUMBERED OR OTHERWISE DISPOSED OF IN THE ABSENCE OF SUCH REGISTRATION OR UNLESS SUCH TRANSACTION IS EXEMPT FROM, OR NOT SUBJECT TO, THE REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS OF THE SECURITIES ACT. THE HOLDER OF THIS SECURITY OR ANY INTEREST OR PARTICIPATION HEREIN, BY ITS ACCEPTANCE HEREOF OR THEREOF, AS THE CASE MAY BE, AGREES TO OFFER, SELL OR OTHERWISE TRANSFER SUCH SECURITY OR ANY INTEREST OR PARTICIPATION HEREIN PRIOR TO THE DATE WHICH IS THE LATER OF (i) TWO YEARS (OR SUCH SHORTER PERIOD OF TIME AS PERMITTED BY RULE 144(k) UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT) AFTER THE LATER OF (Y) THE DATE OF ORIGINAL ISSUANCE HEREOF AND (Z) THE LAST DATE ON WHICH THE COMPANY OR ANY AFFILIATE (AS DEFINED IN RULE 405 UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT) OF THE COMPANY WAS THE HOLDER OF THIS SECURITY OR SUCH INTEREST OR PARTICIPATION (OR ANY PREDECESSOR THERETO) AND (ii) SUCH LATER DATE, IF ANY, AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY ANY SUBSEQUENT CHANGE IN APPLICABLE LAW, ONLY (A) TO THE COMPANY, (B) PURSUANT TO RULE 144A UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT (“RULE 144A”), TO A PERSON THE HOLDER REASONABLY BELIEVES IS A “QUALIFIED INSTITUTIONAL BUYER”, AS DEFINED IN RULE 144A, THAT PURCHASES FOR ITS OWN ACCOUNT OR FOR THE ACCOUNT OF A QUALIFIED INSTITUTIONAL BUYER TO WHOM NOTICE IS GIVEN THAT THE TRANSFER IS BEING MADE IN RELIANCE ON RULE 144A, (C) PURSUANT TO AN EXEMPTION FROM THE REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS OF THE SECURITIES ACT TO AN INSTITUTIONAL “ACCREDITED INVESTOR” WITHIN THE MEANING OF SUBPARAGRAPH (a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’S RIGHT PRIOR TO ANY SUCH OFFER, SALE OR TRANSFER PURSUANT TO CLAUSE (C) OR (E) ABOVE TO REQUIRE THE DELIVERY OF AN OPINION OF COUNSEL, CERTIFICATION AND/OR OTHER INFORMATION SATISFACTORY TO IT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INDENTURE, A COPY OF WHICH MAY BE OBTAINED FROM THE COMPANY. THE HOLDER OF THIS SECURITY OR ANY INTEREST OR PARTICIPATION HEREIN, BY ITS ACCEPTANCE HEREOF OR THEREOF, AS THE CASE MAY BE, AGREES THAT IT WILL COMPLY WITH THE FOREGOING RESTRICTIONS.
 
12

THE HOLDER OF THIS SECURITY OR ANY INTEREST OR PARTICIPATION HEREIN, BY ITS ACCEPTANCE HEREOF OR THEREOF, AS THE CASE MAY BE, ALSO AGREES, REPRESENTS AND WARRANTS THAT IT IS NOT AN EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLAN, INDIVIDUAL RETIREMENT ACCOUNT OR OTHER PLAN OR ARRANGEMENT SUBJECT TO TITLE I OF THE EMPLOYEE RETIREMENT INCOME SECURITY ACT OF 1974, AS AMENDED (“ERISA”), OR SECTION 4975 OF THE INTERNAL REVENUE CODE OF 1986, AS AMENDED (THE “CODE”) (EACH A “PLAN”), OR AN ENTITY WHOSE UNDERLYING ASSETS INCLUDE “PLAN ASSETS” BY REASON OF ANY PLAN'S INVESTMENT IN THE ENTITY AND NO PERSON INVESTING “PLAN ASSETS” OF ANY PLAN MAY ACQUIRE OR HOLD THIS SECURITY OR ANY INTEREST OR PARTICIPATION HEREIN, UNLESS SUCH PURCHASER OR HOLDER IS ELIGIBLE FOR THE EXEMPTIVE RELIEF AVAILABLE UNDER U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR PROHIBITED TRANSACTION CLASS EXEMPTION 96-23, 95-60, 91-38, 90-1 OR 84-14 OR ANOTHER APPLICABLE EXEMPTION OR ITS PURCHASE AND HOLDING OF THIS SECURITY OR SUCH INTEREST OR PARTICIPATION IS NOT PROHIBITED BY SECTION 406 OF ERISA OR SECTION 4975 OF THE CODE WITH RESPECT TO SUCH PURCHASE OR HOLDING. ANY PURCHASER OR HOLDER OF THIS SECURITY OR ANY INTEREST OR PARTICIPATION HEREIN WILL BE DEEMED TO HAVE REPRESENTED BY ITS PURCHASE AND HOLDING HEREOF OR THEREOF, AS THE CASE MAY BE, THAT EITHER (i) IT IS NOT AN EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLAN WITHIN THE MEANING OF SECTION 3(3) OF ERISA, OR A PLAN TO WHICH SECTION 4975 OF THE CODE IS APPLICABLE, A TRUSTEE OR OTHER PERSON ACTING ON BEHALF OF AN EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLAN OR PLAN, OR ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY USING THE ASSETS OF ANY EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PLAN OR PLAN TO FINANCE SUCH PURCHASE, OR (ii) SUCH PURCHASE AND HOLDING WILL NOT RESULT IN A PROHIBITED TRANSACTION UNDER SECTION 406 OF ERISA OR SECTION 4975 OF THE CODE FOR WHICH THERE IS NO APPLICABLE STATUTORY OR ADMINISTRATIVE EXEMPTION.
 
IN CONNECTION WITH ANY TRANSFER, THE HOLDER OF THIS SECURITY WILL DELIVER TO THE TRANSFER AGENT SUCH CERTIFICATES AND OTHER INFORMATION AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY THE INDENTURE TO CONFIRM THAT THE TRANSFER COMPLIES WITH THE FOREGOING RESTRICTIONS.
 
13

THIS SECURITY WILL BE ISSUED AND MAY BE TRANSFERRED ONLY IN MINIMUM DENOMINATIONS OF $100,000 AND MULTIPLES OF $1,000 IN EXCESS THEREOF. ANY ATTEMPTED TRANSFER OF THIS SECURITY IN DENOMINATIONS OF LESS THAN $100,000 SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE VOID AND OF NO LEGAL EFFECT WHATSOEVER. ANY SUCH PURPORTED TRANSFEREE SHALL BE DEEMED NOT TO BE THE HOLDER OF THIS SECURITY OR ANY INTEREST OR PARTICIPATION HEREIN FOR ANY PURPOSE, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE RECEIPT OF DISTRIBUTIONS ON THIS SECURITY OR SUCH INTEREST OR PARTICIPATION, AND SUCH PURPORTED TRANSFEREE SHALL BE DEEMED TO HAVE NO INTEREST WHATSOEVER IN THIS SECURITY OR ANY INTEREST OR PARTICIPATION HEREIN.
 
ALL PAYMENTS OF INTEREST ON AND REPAYMENT OF PRINCIPAL AND PREMIUM, IF ANY, OF THIS SURPLUS NOTE, TO THE EXTENT REQUIRED UNDER APPLICABLE LAW, MAY BE MADE ONLY WITH THE PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE APPLICABLE REGULATORY AUTHORITY (AS DEFINED IN THE INDENTURE). THERE ARE NO SPECIFIC LIMITATIONS ON THE EXTENT OF THE APPLICABLE REGULATORY AUTHORITY’S DISCRETION IN DETERMINING WHETHER THE FINANCIAL CONDITION OF THE COMPANY WARRANTS THE PAYMENT OF SUCH PAYMENTS.
 
SECTION 2.08 Mutilated, Destroyed, Lost or Stolen Surplus Notes.
 
In case any temporary or definitive Surplus Note shall become mutilated or be destroyed, lost or stolen, the Company shall execute, and upon its request the Trustee shall authenticate and deliver, a new Surplus Note bearing a number not contemporaneously outstanding, in exchange and substitution for the mutilated Surplus Note, or in lieu of and in substitution for the Surplus Note so destroyed, lost or stolen. In every case, the applicant for a substituted Surplus Note shall furnish to the Company and the Trustee such security or indemnity as may be reasonably required by them to save each of them harmless, and, in every case of destruction, loss or theft, the applicant shall also furnish to the Company and the Trustee evidence to their satisfaction of the destruction, loss or theft of such Surplus Note and of the ownership thereof.
 
The Trustee may authenticate any such substituted Surplus Note and deliver the same upon the written request or authorization of any officer of the Company. Upon the issuance of any substituted Surplus Note, the Company may require the payment of a sum sufficient to cover any tax or other governmental charge that may be imposed in relation thereto and any other expenses (including fees and expenses of the Trustee) connected therewith. In case any Surplus Note which has matured or is about to mature or has been called for redemption in full shall become mutilated or be destroyed, lost or stolen, the Company may, instead of issuing a substitute Surplus Note, pay or authorize the payment of the same (without surrender thereof except in the case of a mutilated Surplus Note) if the applicant for such payment shall furnish to the Company and the Trustee such security or indemnity as may be reasonably required by them to save each of them harmless and, in case of destruction, loss or theft, evidence satisfactory to the Company and to the Trustee of the destruction, loss or theft of such Surplus Note and of the ownership thereof.
 
14

Every substituted Surplus Note issued pursuant to the provisions of this Section 2.08 by virtue of the fact that any such Surplus Note is destroyed, lost or stolen shall constitute an additional contractual obligation of the Company, whether or not the destroyed, lost or stolen Surplus Note shall be found at any time, and shall be entitled to all the benefits of this Indenture equally and proportionately with any and all other Surplus Notes duly issued hereunder. All Surplus Notes shall be held and owned upon the express condition that, to the extent permitted by applicable law, the foregoing provisions are exclusive with respect to the replacement or payment of mutilated, destroyed, lost or stolen Surplus Notes and shall preclude any and all other rights or remedies notwithstanding any law or statute existing or hereafter enacted to the contrary with respect to the replacement or payment of negotiable instruments or other securities without their surrender.
 
SECTION 2.09 Temporary Surplus Notes.
 
Pending the preparation of definitive Surplus Notes, the Company may execute and the Trustee shall authenticate and deliver temporary Surplus Notes (typed, printed or lithographed). Temporary Surplus Notes shall be issuable in any authorized denomination, and substantially in the form of the definitive Surplus Notes but with such omissions, insertions and variations as may be appropriate for temporary Surplus Notes, all as may be determined by the Company. Every such temporary Surplus Note shall be executed by the Company and be authenticated by the Trustee upon the same conditions and in substantially the same manner, and with the same effect, as the definitive Surplus Notes. Without unreasonable delay the Company will execute and deliver to the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent definitive Surplus Notes and thereupon any or all temporary Surplus Notes may be surrendered in exchange therefor, at the Principal Office of the Trustee or at any office or agency maintained by the Company for such purpose as provided in Section 3.03, and the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent shall authenticate and deliver in exchange for such temporary Surplus Notes a like aggregate principal amount of such definitive Surplus Notes. Such exchange shall be made by the Company at its own expense and without any charge therefor except that in case of any such exchange involving a registration of transfer the Company may require payment of a sum sufficient to cover any tax, fee or other governmental charge that may be imposed in relation thereto. Until so exchanged, the temporary Surplus Notes shall in all respects be entitled to the same benefits under this Indenture as definitive Surplus Notes authenticated and delivered hereunder.
 
SECTION 2.10 Cancellation of Surplus Notes Paid, etc.
 
All Surplus Notes surrendered for the purpose of payment, redemption, exchange or registration of transfer, shall, if surrendered to the Company or any paying agent, be surrendered to the Trustee and promptly cancelled by it, or, if surrendered to the Trustee or any Authenticating Agent, shall be promptly cancelled by it, and no Surplus Notes shall be issued in lieu thereof except as expressly permitted by any of the provisions of this Indenture. All Surplus Notes cancelled by any Authenticating Agent shall be delivered to the Trustee. The Trustee shall dispose of cancelled Surplus Notes in accordance with its customary procedures. If the Company shall acquire any of the Surplus Notes, however, such acquisition shall not operate as a redemption or satisfaction of the indebtedness represented by such Surplus Notes unless and until the same are surrendered to the Trustee for cancellation.
 
15

SECTION 2.11 Interest.
 
(a) Each Surplus Note will bear interest at the then applicable Interest Rate for each Interest Payment Period until the principal thereof becomes due and payable, and on any overdue principal and, to the extent that payment of such interest is enforceable under applicable law, on any Defaulted Interest at the then applicable Interest Rate, compounded quarterly, payable quarterly in arrears on February 2, May 2, August 2 and November 2 of each year, commencing on November 2 (each, an “Interest Payment Date”), to the Person in whose name such Surplus Note or any Predecessor Surplus Note is registered at the close of business on the relevant record date, which will be the fifteenth calendar day (whether or not a Business Day) preceding the relevant Interest Payment Date. FOR THE AVOIDANCE OF DOUBT, NO INTEREST SHALL ACCRUE OR BE PAYABLE ON ANY PAYMENT OF INTEREST THAT IS NOT MADE WHEN DUE AS A RESULT OF A PAYMENT RESTRICTION.
 
(b) The amount of interest payable for any Interest Payment Period will be computed on the basis of a 360-day year and the actual number of days elapsed in such Interest Payment Period.
 
(c) In the event that (i) any Interest Payment Date, (ii) the Stated Maturity date or (ii) earlier redemption date is not a Business Day, then payment of principal, premium, if any, and interest payable on such date will be paid on, and such Interest Payment Date will be moved to, the next succeeding Business Day, and additional interest will accrue for each day that such payment is delayed as a result thereof, except that, if such next Business Day is in the next succeeding calendar month, such payment shall be made on the preceding Business Day, in each case with the same force and effect as if made on the date such payment otherwise would have been payable.
 
(d) All percentages resulting from any calculations on the Surplus Notes will be rounded, if necessary, to the nearest one hundred-thousandth of a percentage point, with five one-millionths of a percentage point rounded upward (e.g., 7.553455% (or .07553455) being rounded to 7.55346% (or .0755346)), and all dollar amounts used in or resulting from such calculation will be rounded to the nearest cent (with one-half cent being rounded upward).
 
(e) On each Determination Date, the Calculation Agent will calculate, and will give notice in writing to the Company and the paying agent, of the applicable Interest Rate for the related Interest Payment Period and shall give such notice in writing to any Holder of Surplus Notes that so requests. Absent manifest error, the Calculation Agent’s determination of LIBOR and its calculation of the applicable Interest Rate for any Interest Payment Period will be final and binding. The Company shall, from time to time, provide any necessary information to the paying agent relating to any original issue discount and interest on the Surplus Notes that is included in any payment and reportable for taxable income calculation purposes.
 
16

SECTION 2.12 Regulatory Interest Limitations and Adjustments.
 
Notwithstanding any other provision contained herein, the Company shall not be required to make any payment of interest on the Surplus Notes for any Interest Payment Period that is in excess of the Regulatory Interest Limitation, if any, applicable to such Interest Payment Period. In calculating the Interest Rate for any Interest Payment Period, in the event that there is any Excess Interest as of such Interest Payment Period, the Interest Rate shall be increased, to the extent necessary, but subject to any Regulatory Interest Limitation applicable to such Interest Payment Period, such that the amount of interest payable for such Interest Payment Period is increased by the amount of Excess Interest. FOR THE AVOIDANCE OF DOUBT, NO INTEREST SHALL ACCRUE OR BE PAYABLE ON ANY PAYMENT OF INTEREST OR PORTION THEREOF THAT IS NOT MADE AS A RESULT OF A REGULATORY INTEREST LIMITATION.
 
(a) In the event that a Regulatory Interest Limitation becomes applicable to an interest payment payable on an Interest Payment Date, or an adjustment is required to be made to the rate of interest payable on an Interest Payment Date as a result of Excess Interest, the Company shall provide the Holders and the Trustee with an Officers’ Certificate giving notice of such Regulatory Interest Limitation or adjustment to the rate of interest, as the case may be, as soon as practicable prior to such Interest Payment Date.
 
SECTION 2.13 CUSIP Number.
 
The Company in issuing the Surplus Notes may use a “CUSIP” number (if then generally in use), and, if so, the Trustee shall use such “CUSIP” number in notices of redemption as a convenience to Holders; provided that any such notice may state that no representation is made as to the correctness of such number either as printed on the Surplus Notes or as contained in any notice of a redemption and that reliance may be placed only on the other identification numbers printed on the Surplus Notes, and any such redemption shall not be affected by any defect in or omission of such numbers. The Company will promptly notify the Trustee of any change in the “CUSIP” number.
 
ARTICLE III
PARTICULAR COVENANTS OF THE COMPANY
 
SECTION 3.01 Payment of Principal, Premium, if any, and Interest.
 
(a) Subject to Section 3.02, the Company covenants and agrees for the benefit of the Holders of the Surplus Notes that it will duly and punctually pay or cause to be paid the principal of, and premium, if any, and interest on, the Surplus Notes at the place, at the times and in the manner provided in the Surplus Notes. Each installment of interest on the Surplus Notes may be paid at the option of the Company by check mailed to the Holder entitled thereto at such address as shall appear in the Surplus Note Register or by wire transfer to an account appropriately designated by the Holders of Surplus Notes entitled thereto. Payments of principal of, and premium, if any, and interest on, the Surplus Notes due at Stated Maturity or earlier redemption shall be made by the Company in same-day funds against presentation and surrender of the Surplus Note. Notwithstanding the foregoing, so long as the Holder of a Surplus Note is CSFB, I-TRUPS or a trustee of I-TRUPS, the payment of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on the Surplus Note will be made by the Company in same-day funds at such place and to such account as may be designated by such Holder.
 
17

(b) In the event that the Company is prohibited from making any payment of principal and premium, if any, of and/or interest on the Surplus Notes because of a Payment Restriction, the Company shall, not later than three (3) Business Days prior to the applicable Interest Payment Date or redemption date, provide the Trustee with an Officer’s Certificate giving notice of such prohibition. Promptly (and in no event later than thirty (30) days) after the removal of any prohibition on the payment of all or a portion of the principal and premium, if any, of a Surplus Note or interest thereon as a result of a Payment Restriction, the Company shall (i) provide the Trustee with an Officer’s Certificate giving the Trustee notice of the removal of any such prohibition and (ii) make payment of all amounts then past due and owing under the Surplus Note (including any Unpaid Interest) that are no longer prohibited by a Payment Restriction. Upon receipt of any such Officer’s Certificate, the Trustee shall give notice to the Securityholders of the removal of any prohibition relating to the payment of the principal of and interest on the Surplus Notes; provided, however, that no interest shall accrue or be payable on any payment of interest that is not paid when due as a result of a Payment Restriction.
 
(c) Subject to Section 3.02 or as provided for in Section 15.03, the obligation of the Company to pay the principal and premium, if any, of and interest on the Surplus Notes at the times, place and rate, and in the coin or currency, prescribed in this Indenture shall be absolute and unconditional. No provision of this Indenture or the Surplus Notes shall extinguish the Company’s liability for the payment of principal and interest.
 
(d) If the Applicable Regulatory Authority approves a payment of principal and premium, if any, or interest in any amount that is less than the full amount of the principal and premium, if any, or interest, as applicable, then scheduled to be paid in respect of the Surplus Notes, payment of such partial amount shall be made pro rata among Securityholders based on the relative outstanding principal amount of Surplus Notes held by each Securityholder.
 
(e) The Company will treat the Surplus Notes as indebtedness, and the interest payable in respect of such Surplus Notes as interest, for all U.S. federal income tax purposes. All payments in respect of such Surplus Notes will be made free and clear of U.S. withholding tax to any beneficial owner thereof that has provided an Internal Revenue Service Form W-8 BEN (or any substitute or successor form) establishing its non-U.S. status for U.S. federal income tax purposes.
 
(f) Until such time as the Company shall receive the approval of the Applicable Regulatory Authority for a payment under the Surplus Notes, the obligation of the Company to make such payment shall not form a part of the Company’s legal liabilities and shall not be a basis of any set off. Until repaid, all statements published or filed with the Applicable Regulatory Authority by the Company shall show all outstanding principal amounts under the Surplus Notes in accordance with the Applicable Insurance Laws.
 
18

SECTION 3.02 Payment Restrictions.
 
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary set forth herein, if and to the extent required under Applicable Insurance Laws for the Company to be permitted to report in its statutory financial statements filed with the Applicable Regulatory Authority the outstanding amounts under the Surplus Notes as constituting part of the Company’s policyholders’ surplus, any payment of interest on and/or principal and premium, if any, of the Surplus Notes, may be made only from the Available Amount of the Company (a) with the prior approval of the Applicable Regulatory Authority or (b) to the extent that such payment is otherwise permitted under the Applicable Insurance Laws (the foregoing conditions are referred to herein as the “Payment Restrictions”).
 
SECTION 3.03 Offices for Notices and Payments, etc.
 
So long as any of the Surplus Notes remain outstanding, the Company will maintain in Houston, Texas or Blue Bell, Pennsylvania an office or agency where the Surplus Notes may be presented for payment, where the Surplus Notes may be presented for registration of transfer and for exchange as in this Indenture provided and where notices and demands to or upon the Company in respect of the Surplus Notes or this Indenture may be served. The Company will give to the Trustee written notice of the location of any such office or agency and of any change of location thereof. Until otherwise designated from time to time by the Company in a notice to the Trustee, any such office or agency for all of the above purposes shall be the Principal Office of the Trustee. In case the Company shall fail to maintain any such office or agency in Houston, Texas or Blue Bell, Pennsylvania, or shall fail to give such notice of the location or of any change in the location thereof, presentations and demands may be made and notices may be served at the designated corporate trust office of the Trustee.
 
In addition to any such office or agency, the Company may from time to time designate one or more offices or agencies outside Houston, Texas or Blue Bell, Pennsylvania, where the Surplus Notes may be presented for registration of transfer and for exchange in the manner provided in this Indenture, and the Company may from time to time rescind such designation, as the Company may deem desirable or expedient; provided, however, that no such designation or rescission shall in any manner relieve the Company of its obligation to maintain any such office or agency in Houston, Texas or Blue Bell, Pennsylvania, for the purposes above mentioned. The Company will give to the Trustee prompt written notice of any such designation or rescission thereof.
 
SECTION 3.04 Appointments to Fill Vacancies in Trustee’s Office.
 
The Company, whenever necessary to avoid or fill a vacancy in the office of Trustee, will appoint, in the manner provided in Section 6.10, a Trustee, so that there shall at all times be a Trustee hereunder.
 
SECTION 3.05 Provisions as to Paying Agent.
 
(a) If the Company shall appoint a paying agent other than the Trustee with respect to the Surplus Notes, it will cause such paying agent to execute and deliver to the Trustee an instrument in which such agent shall agree with the Trustee, subject to the provisions of this Section 3.05:
 
19

(1) that it will hold all sums held by it as such agent for the payment of the principal of, and premium, if any, or interest, if any, on, the Surplus Notes (whether such sums have been paid to it by the Company or by any other obligor on the Surplus Notes) in trust for the benefit of the Holders of the Surplus Notes; and
 
(2) that it will give the Trustee notice of any failure by the Company (or by any other obligor on the Surplus Notes) to make any payment of the principal of, and premium, if any, or interest, if any, on, the Surplus Notes when the same shall be due and payable.
 
(b) If the Company shall act as its own paying agent, it will, on or before each due date of the principal of and premium, if any, or interest, if any, on the Surplus Notes, set aside, segregate and hold in trust for the benefit of the Holders of the Surplus Notes a sum sufficient to pay such principal, premium or interest so becoming due and will notify the Trustee of any failure to take such action and of any failure by the Company (or by any other obligor under the Surplus Notes) to make any payment of the principal of, and premium, if any, or interest, if any, on, the Surplus Notes when the same shall become due and payable.
 
(c) Anything in this Section 3.05 to the contrary notwithstanding, the Company may, at any time, for the purpose of obtaining a satisfaction and discharge with respect to the Surplus Notes hereunder, or for any other reason, pay or cause to be paid to the Trustee all sums held in trust by the Company or any paying agent hereunder, as required by this Section 3.05, such sums to be held by the Trustee upon the trusts herein contained.
 
(d) Anything in this Section 3.05 to the contrary notwithstanding, the agreement to hold sums in trust as provided in this Section 3.05 is subject to Sections 11.03 and 11.04.
 
(e) The Company hereby appoints the Trustee as the initial paying agent for the Surplus Notes.
 
SECTION 3.06 Certificate to Trustee.
 
The Company will deliver to the Trustee, within 120 days after the end of each fiscal year, so long as Surplus Notes are outstanding hereunder, a certificate from the principal executive, financial or accounting officer of the Company stating that in the course of the performance by the signers of their duties as officers of the Company they would normally have knowledge of any default by the Company in the performance of any covenants contained herein, stating whether or not they have knowledge of any such default and, if so, specifying each such default of which the signers have knowledge and the nature thereof, all without regard to periods of grace or notice requirements.
 
SECTION 3.07 Compliance with Consolidation Provisions.
 
The Company will not, while any of the Surplus Notes remain outstanding, undergo a Conversion, consolidate with, or merge into, or merge into itself, or sell, convey, transfer or otherwise dispose of all or substantially all of its property to any other entity unless the provisions of Article X hereof are complied with.
 
20

SECTION 3.08 Limitations on Dividends; Etc.
 
If there shall have occurred a Default or an Event of Default, or if there is a failure to make a payment of principal, premium, if any, or interest as a result of a Payment Restriction, then the Company shall not (a) declare or pay any dividend on, make any distribution or other payment with respect to, or redeem, purchase, acquire or make a liquidation payment with respect to, any of its capital stock or make any guarantee payment with respect thereto (other than (i) repurchases, redemptions or other acquisitions of shares of capital stock in connection with the satisfaction by the Company of its obligations under any employee benefit plans, (ii) as a result of an exchange or conversion of one class or series of the Company’s capital stock for another class or series of the Company’s capital stock, (iii) the purchase of fractional interests in shares of the Company’s capital stock pursuant to the conversion or exchange provisions of such Company capital stock or the security being converted or exchanged, (iv) any declaration of a dividend in connection with any shareholders’ rights plan or the redemption or repurchase of rights pursuant thereto, or (v) any dividend or distribution in the form of capital stock where the rights of the capital stock being issued, or issuable pursuant to such rights, rank pari passu or junior to the capital stock as to which such dividend or distribution is paid), or (b) make any payment of interest, principal or premium, if any, on or repay, repurchase or redeem any debt securities issued by the Company that rank pari passu with or junior to the Surplus Notes, in each case, other than as may be required under Applicable Insurance Laws.
 
SECTION 3.09 Notice of Default.
 
The Company shall file with the Trustee written notice of the occurrence of any Event of Default within 5 Business Days of its becoming aware of any such Event of Default.
 
ARTICLE IV
SECURITYHOLDERS’ LISTS AND REPORTS BY THE COMPANY
AND THE TRUSTEE
 
SECTION 4.01 Securityholders’ Lists.
 
The Company covenants and agrees that it will furnish or cause to be furnished to the Trustee:
 
(a) on each regular record date for the Surplus Notes, a list, in such form as the Trustee may reasonably require, of the names and addresses of the Holders of the Surplus Notes as of such record date; and
 
(b) at such other times as the Trustee may request in writing, within 30 days after the receipt by the Company, of any such request, a list of similar form and content as of a date not more than 15 days prior to the time such list is furnished;
 
except that no such lists need be furnished so long as the Trustee is in possession thereof by reason of its acting as Surplus Note registrar for the Surplus Notes.
 
21

SECTION 4.02 Preservation and Disclosure of Lists.
 
(a) The Trustee shall preserve, in as current a form as is reasonably practicable, all information as to the names and addresses of the Holders of Surplus Notes (1) contained in the most recent list furnished to it as provided in Section 4.01 or (2) received by it in the capacity of Surplus Notes registrar (if so acting) hereunder. The Trustee may destroy any list furnished to it as provided in Section 4.01 upon receipt of a new list so furnished.
 
(b) In case three or more Holders of Surplus Notes (hereinafter referred to as “applicants”) apply in writing to the Trustee and furnish to the Trustee reasonable proof that each such applicant has owned a Surplus Note for a period of at least 6 months preceding the date of such application, and such application states that the applicants desire to communicate with other Holders of Surplus Notes with respect to their rights under this Indenture or under such Surplus Notes and is accompanied by a copy of the form of proxy or other communication which such applicants propose to transmit, then the Trustee shall within 5 Business Days after the receipt of such application, at its election, either:
 
(1) afford such applicants access to the information preserved at the time by the Trustee in accordance with the provisions of subsection (a) of this Section 4.02; or
 
(2) inform such applicants as to the approximate number of Holders of Surplus Notes, as the case may be, whose names and addresses appear in the information preserved at the time by the Trustee in accordance with the provisions of subsection (a) of this Section 4.02, and as to the approximate cost of mailing to such Securityholders the form of proxy or other communication, if any, specified in such application.
 
If the Trustee shall elect not to afford such applicants access to such information, the Trustee shall, upon the written request of such applicants, mail to each Securityholder whose name and address appear in the information preserved at the time by the Trustee in accordance with the provisions of subsection (a) of this Section 4.02 a copy of the form of proxy or other communication which is specified in such request with reasonable promptness after a tender to the Trustee of the material to be mailed and of payment, or provision for the payment, of the reasonable expenses of mailing, unless within 5 days after such tender, the Trustee shall mail to such applicants (and file with the Commission, if permitted or required under applicable law, together with a copy of the material to be mailed) a written statement to the effect that, in the opinion of the Trustee, such mailing would be contrary to the best interests of the Holders of Surplus Notes or would be in violation of applicable law. Such written statement shall specify the basis of such opinion. If the Commission, if permitted or required under applicable law, after opportunity for a hearing upon the objections specified in the written statement so filed, shall enter an order refusing to sustain any of such objections or if, after the entry of an order sustaining one or more of such objections, the Commission shall find, after notice and opportunity for hearing, that all the objections so sustained have been met and shall enter an order so declaring, the Trustee shall mail copies of such material to all such Securityholders with reasonable promptness after the entry of such order and the renewal of such tender; otherwise the Trustee shall be relieved of any obligation or duty to such applicants respecting their application.
 
22

(c) Each and every Holder of Surplus Notes, by receiving and holding the same, agrees with the Company and the Trustee that neither the Company nor the Trustee nor any paying agent shall be held accountable by reason of the disclosure of any such information as to the names and addresses of the Holders of Surplus Notes in accordance with the provisions of subsection (b) of this Section 4.02, regardless of the source from which such information was derived, and that the Trustee shall not be held accountable by reason of mailing any material pursuant to a request made under said subsection (b).
 
SECTION 4.03 Reports by Company.
 
(a) If and for so long as CSFB, I-TRUPS or a trustee of I-TRUPS is the Holder of the Surplus Notes, the Company covenants and agrees to file with such Holder and the Trustee, (i) not later than 45 days after the end of each quarterly calendar period ending after the date of this Indenture, (A) unaudited statutory financial statements of the Company (including balance sheet and income statement) covering such period, as filed with the Applicable Regulatory Authority and (B) an Officer’s Certificate of the Company to the effect specified in Exhibit B hereto; (ii) not later than 60 days after the end of each calendar year, the unaudited statutory Annual Statement of the Company (including balance sheet and income statement) covering such fiscal year, as filed with the Applicable Regulatory Authority; (iii) upon the date of the filing with the Applicable Regulatory Authority of the report of the independent accountants with respect to the Company's audited financial statements for each calendar year, but in no event later than June 1 following the end of such calendar year, (A) audited financial statements of the Company (including balance sheet and income statement) covering such period and the corresponding report of the independent accountants and (B) an Officer’s Certificate of the Company detailing any material differences between the unaudited statutory Annual Statements for such calendar year delivered pursuant to clause (ii) above and the audited financial statements delivered pursuant to this clause; (iv) not later than 30 days after the end of the calendar year of the Company, Form 1099 or such other annual U.S. federal income tax information statement required by the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), containing such information with regard to the Surplus Notes as is required by the Code and the income tax regulations of the U.S. Treasury thereunder; and (v) each report on Form 10-K and Form 10-Q prepared by the Company and filed with the Commission, if any, in accordance with the Exchange Act within 5 Business Days after the filing thereof.
 
(b) If at any time none of CSFB, I-TRUPS or a trustee of I-TRUPS remains a holder of the Surplus Notes, the Company shall deliver to each Holder (i) not later than 30 days after the end of the calendar year of the Company, Form 1099 or such other annual U.S. federal income tax information statement required by the Code, if any, containing such information with regard to the Surplus Notes held by such Securityholder as is required by the Code and the income tax regulations of the U.S. Treasury thereunder, (ii) each report on Form 10-K and Form 10-Q prepared by the Company and filed with the Commission, if any, in accordance with the Exchange Act not later than 15 days after the filing thereof and (iii) if the Company is at any time neither subject to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Exchange Act nor exempt from reporting pursuant to Rule 12g3-2(b) thereunder, the information required to be provided by Rule 144A(d)(4) under the Securities Act.
 
23

(c) The Company covenants and agrees to file with the Trustee and the Commission, in accordance with the rules and regulations prescribed from time to time by the Commission, such additional information, documents and reports with respect to compliance by the Company with the conditions and covenants provided for in this Indenture as may be required from time to time by such rules and regulations.
 
(d) Delivery of such reports, information and documents to the Trustee is for informational purposes only and the Trustee’s receipt of such shall not constitute constructive notice of any information contained therein or determinable from information contained therein, including the Company’s compliance with any of its covenants hereunder (as to which the Trustee is entitled to rely exclusively on Officers’ Certificates).
 
ARTICLE V
REMEDIES OF THE TRUSTEE AND SECURITYHOLDERS
ON EVENT OF DEFAULT
 
SECTION 5.01 Events of Default.
 
If one or more of the following events shall have occurred and be continuing, such event shall constitute an event of default hereunder (each, an “Event of Default”):
 
(a) default in the payment of any interest upon any Surplus Notes when it becomes due and payable, and continuance of such default for a period of 30 days (it being understood that the failure to make a payment of interest as a result of a Payment Restriction shall not constitute a default in the payment of interest for this purpose or an Event of Default); or
 
(b) default in the payment of all or any part of the principal of, or premium, if any, on, any Surplus Notes as and when the same shall become due and payable, whether at maturity, upon redemption, by declaration or otherwise (it being understood that the failure to make a payment of principal or premium, if any, as a result of a Payment Restriction shall not constitute a default in the payment of principal or premium, if any, for this purpose or an Event of Default); or
 
(c) default in the performance, or breach, of any covenant or warranty of the Company in this Indenture (other than a covenant or warranty a default in whose performance or whose breach is elsewhere in this Section 5.01 specifically dealt with), and continuance of such default or breach for a period of 90 days after there has been given, by registered or certified mail, to the Company by the Trustee or to the Company and the Trustee by the Holders of at least 25% in principal amount of the outstanding Surplus Notes, a written notice specifying such default or breach and requiring it to be remedied and stating that such notice is a “Notice of Default” hereunder; or
 
(d) a state or federal regulator or agency having jurisdiction over the Company shall obtain or issue an order for its rehabilitation, liquidation, conservation, supervision or dissolution and such order shall remain unstayed and in effect for a period of 90 consecutive days; or
 
(e) the Company shall volunteer with respect to, or consent or agree to an order for, its rehabilitation, liquidation, conservation, supervision or dissolution.
 
24

If an Event of Default occurs and is continuing, and in each and every such case, unless the principal of all of the Surplus Notes shall have already become due and payable, either the Trustee or the Holders of not less than 25% in aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Notes then outstanding hereunder, by notice in writing to the Company (and to the Trustee if given by Securityholders), may declare the entire principal of, premium, if any, and accrued, but unpaid, interest on the Surplus Notes, to be due and payable immediately, and upon any such declaration the same shall become immediately due and payable, subject to any Payment Restrictions. If an Event of Default referenced under clause (d) or (e) of this Section 5.01 shall have occurred, the principal of, premium, if any, and accrued, but unpaid, interest on the Surplus Notes will automatically become immediately due and payable without further action, subject to any Payment Restrictions.
 
The foregoing provisions, however, are subject to the condition that if, at any time after the principal of the Surplus Notes shall have been so declared due and payable, and before any judgment or decree for the payment of the moneys due shall have been obtained or entered as hereinafter provided, the Company shall pay or shall deposit with the Trustee a sum sufficient to pay all matured installments of interest upon all the Surplus Notes and the principal of and premium, if any, on any and all Surplus Notes which shall have become due otherwise than by acceleration (with interest upon such principal and premium, if any, and, to the extent that payment of such interest is enforceable under applicable law, on overdue installments of interest, at the same rate as the rate of interest then borne by the Surplus Notes, to the date of such payment or deposit) and such amount as shall be sufficient to cover compensation to the Trustee and each predecessor Trustee, their respective agents, attorneys and counsel, and all other expenses and liabilities incurred, and all advances made, by the Trustee and each predecessor Trustee except as a result of negligence or bad faith, and if any and all Events of Default under the Indenture, other than the non-payment of the principal of or premium, if any, on Surplus Notes which shall have become due by acceleration, shall have been cured, waived or otherwise remedied as provided in this Indenture, then and in every such case the Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Notes then outstanding, by written notice to the Company and to the Trustee, may waive all defaults and rescind and annul such declaration and its consequences, but no such waiver or rescission and annulment shall extend to or shall affect any subsequent default or shall impair any right consequent thereon.
 
In case the Trustee shall have proceeded to enforce any right under this Indenture and such proceedings shall have been discontinued or abandoned because of such rescission or annulment or for any other reason or shall have been determined adversely to the Trustee, then and in every such case the Company, the Trustee and the Holders of the Surplus Notes shall be restored respectively to their several positions and rights hereunder, and all rights, remedies and powers of the Company, the Trustee and the Holders of the Surplus Notes shall continue as though no such proceeding had been taken.
 
SECTION 5.02 Payment of Surplus Notes on Default; Suit Therefor.
 
The Company covenants that in case an Event of Default under Section 5.01(a), (b) or (c) shall have occurred and be continuing, then, upon demand of the Trustee, the Company, subject to Section 3.02 hereof, will pay to the Trustee, for the benefit of the Holders of the Surplus Notes, the whole amount that then shall have become due and payable on all Surplus Notes for principal and premium, if any, or interest, or both, as the case may be, with interest upon the overdue principal and premium, if any, and (to the extent that payment of such interest is enforceable under applicable law) upon any Defaulted Interest at the rate borne by the Surplus Notes; and, in addition thereto, such further amount as shall be sufficient to cover the costs and expenses of collection, including a reasonable compensation to the Trustee, its agents, attorneys and counsel, and any expenses or liabilities incurred by the Trustee hereunder other than through its negligence or bad faith.
 
25

In case the Company shall fail forthwith to pay such amounts upon such demand, the Trustee, in its own name and as trustee of an express trust, shall be entitled and empowered to institute any actions or proceedings at law or in equity for the collection of the sums so due and unpaid, and may prosecute any such action or proceeding to judgment or final decree, and may enforce any such judgment or final decree against the Company or any other obligor on the Surplus Notes and collect in the manner provided by law out of the property of the Company or any other obligor on the Surplus Notes wherever situated the moneys adjudged or decreed to be payable.
 
In case an Event of Default under Section 5.01(d) or (e) shall have occurred, the Trustee, irrespective of whether the principal of the Surplus Notes shall then be due and payable as therein expressed or by declaration or otherwise and irrespective of whether the Trustee shall have made any demand pursuant to the provisions of this Section 5.02, shall be entitled and empowered, by intervention in such proceedings or otherwise, (a) to file and prove a claim or claims for the whole amount of principal and interest owing and unpaid in respect of the Surplus Notes and, in case of any judicial proceedings, to file such proofs of claim and other papers or documents as may be necessary or advisable in order to have the claims of the Trustee (including any claim for reasonable compensation to the Trustee and each predecessor Trustee, and their respective agents, attorneys and counsel, and for reimbursement of all expenses and liabilities incurred, and all advances made, by the Trustee and each predecessor Trustee, except as a result of negligence or bad faith) and of the Securityholders allowed in such judicial proceedings relative to the Company or any other obligor on the Surplus Notes, or to the creditors or property of the Company or such other obligor, unless prohibited by applicable law and regulations, (b) to vote on behalf of the Holders of the Surplus Notes in any election of a trustee or standby trustee in any rehabilitation, liquidation, conservation or supervision proceedings (or of a Person performing similar functions in comparable proceedings), and (c) to collect and receive any moneys or other property payable or deliverable on any such claims, and to distribute the same after the deduction of its charges and expenses; and any receiver, assignee or trustee in any rehabilitation, liquidation, conservation, supervision or liquidation proceeding is hereby authorized by each of the Securityholders to make such payments to the Trustee, and, in the event that the Trustee shall consent to the making of such payments directly to the Securityholders, to pay to the Trustee such amounts as shall be sufficient to cover reasonable compensation to the Trustee, each predecessor Trustee and their respective agents, attorneys and counsel, and all other expenses and liabilities incurred, and all advances made by the Trustee and each predecessor Trustee except as a result of negligence or bad faith.
 
Nothing herein contained shall be construed to authorize the Trustee to authorize or consent to or accept or adopt on behalf of any Securityholder any plan of rehabilitation, arrangement, adjustment or composition affecting the Surplus Notes or the rights of any Holder thereof or to authorize the Trustee to vote in respect of the claim of any Securityholder in any such proceeding.
 
26

All rights of action and of asserting claims under this Indenture, or under any of the Surplus Notes, may be enforced by the Trustee without the possession of any of the Surplus Notes, or the production thereof on any trial or other proceeding relative thereto, and any such suit or proceeding instituted by the Trustee shall be brought in its own name as trustee of an express trust, and any recovery of judgment shall be for the ratable benefit of the Holders of the Surplus Notes.
 
In any proceedings brought by the Trustee (and also any proceedings involving the interpretation of any provision of this Indenture to which the Trustee shall be a party) the Trustee shall be held to represent all the Holders of the Surplus Notes, and it shall not be necessary to make any Holders of the Surplus Notes parties to any such proceedings.
 
SECTION 5.03 Application of Moneys Collected by Trustee.
 
Any moneys collected by the Trustee pursuant to this Article V shall be applied in the following order, at the date or dates fixed by the Trustee for the distribution of such moneys, upon presentation of the several Surplus Notes in respect of which moneys have been collected, and stamping thereon the payment, if only partially paid, and upon surrender thereof if fully paid:
 
First: To the payment of costs and expenses of collection applicable to the Surplus Notes and compensation to the Trustee, its agents, attorneys and counsel, and of all other expenses and liabilities incurred, and all advances made, by the Trustee except as a result of its negligence or bad faith;
 
Second: To the payment of all Senior Claims and Senior Indebtedness of the Company if and to the extent required by Article XV hereof;
 
Third: To the payment of the amounts then due and unpaid upon Surplus Notes for principal of (and premium, if any) and interest on the Surplus Notes, in respect of which or for the benefit of which money has been collected, ratably, without preference or priority of any kind, according to the amounts due on Surplus Notes for principal (and premium, if any) and interest, respectively; and
 
Fourth: The balance, if any, to the Company.
 
SECTION 5.04 Proceedings by Securityholders.
 
No Holder of any Surplus Note shall have any right by virtue of or by availing of any provision of this Indenture to institute any suit, action or proceeding, judicial or otherwise, in equity or at law upon or under or with respect to this Indenture or for the appointment of a receiver, custodian, assigner, liquidator, sequestrator or trustee (or other similar official), or for any other remedy hereunder, unless such Holder previously shall have given to the Trustee written notice of an Event of Default and of the continuance thereof with respect to the Surplus Notes specifying such Event of Default, as hereinbefore provided, and unless also the Holders of not less than 25% in aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Notes then outstanding shall have made written request upon the Trustee to institute such action, suit or proceeding in its own name as Trustee hereunder and shall have offered to the Trustee security or indemnity reasonably satisfactory to the Trustee as it may require against the costs, expenses and liabilities to be incurred therein or thereby, and the Trustee for 60 days after its receipt of such notice and such notice has not been rescinded, request and offer of indemnity shall have failed to institute any such action, suit or proceeding, it being understood and intended, and being expressly covenanted by the taker and Holder of every Surplus Note with every other taker and Holder and the Trustee, that no one or more Holders of Surplus Notes shall have any right in any manner whatever by virtue of or by availing of any provision of this Indenture to affect, disturb or prejudice the rights of any other Holder of Surplus Notes, or to obtain or seek to obtain priority over or preference to any other such Holder, or to enforce any right under this Indenture, except in the manner herein provided and for the equal, ratable and common benefit of all Holders of Surplus Notes.
 
27

Notwithstanding any other provisions in this Indenture, however, the right of any Holder of any Surplus Note to receive payment of the principal of (and premium, if any) and interest, if any, on such Surplus Note, on or after the same shall have become due and payable, or to institute suit for the enforcement of any such payment, shall not be impaired or affected without the consent of such Holder. For the protection and enforcement of the provisions of this Section, each and every Securityholder and the Trustee shall be entitled to such relief as can be given either at law or in equity.
 
SECTION 5.05 Proceedings by Trustee.
 
In case of an Event of Default, the Trustee may in its discretion proceed to protect and enforce the rights vested in it by this Indenture by such appropriate judicial proceedings as the Trustee shall deem most effectual to protect and enforce any of such rights, either by suit in equity or by action at law or by proceeding in insolvency or otherwise, whether for the specific enforcement of any covenant or agreement contained in this Indenture or in aid of the exercise of any power granted in this Indenture, or to enforce any other legal or equitable right vested in the Trustee by this Indenture or by law.
 
SECTION 5.06 Remedies Cumulative and Continuing.
 
Except as otherwise provided in the last paragraph of Section 2.08 with respect to the replacement or payment of mutilated, lost or stolen Surplus Notes, all powers and remedies given by this Article V to the Trustee or to the Securityholders shall, to the extent permitted by law, be deemed cumulative and not exclusive of any other powers and remedies available to the Trustee or the Holders of the Surplus Notes by judicial proceedings or otherwise, to enforce the performance or observance of the covenants and agreements contained in this Indenture, and no delay or omission of the Trustee or any Holder of any of the Surplus Notes to exercise any right or power accruing upon any Event of Default occurring and continuing as aforesaid shall impair any such right or power, or shall be construed to be a waiver of any such default or an acquiescence therein; and, subject to the provisions of Section 5.04, every power and remedy given by this Article V or by law to the Trustee or to the Securityholders may be exercised from time to time, and as often as shall be deemed expedient, by the Trustee or by the Securityholders.
 
28

SECTION 5.07 Direction of Proceedings and Waiver of Defaults by Majority of Securityholders.
 
The Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Notes at the time outstanding shall have the right to direct the time, method, and place of conducting any proceeding for any remedy available to the Trustee, or exercising any trust or power conferred on the Trustee, in respect of the Surplus Notes; provided, however, that such direction shall not be in conflict with any rule or law or with this Indenture and that (subject to the provisions of Section 6.01) the Trustee shall have the right to decline to follow any such direction if the Trustee shall determine that the action so directed would be unjustly prejudicial to the Holders that are entitled but fail to take part in such direction or if the Trustee being advised by counsel determines that the action or proceeding so directed may not lawfully be taken or if the Trustee in good faith by its board of directors or trustees, executive committee, or a trust committee of directors or trustees and/or Responsible Officers shall determine that the action or proceedings so directed would involve the Trustee in personal liability. Prior to any declaration accelerating the maturity of the Surplus Notes, the Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Notes at the time outstanding may on behalf of the Holders of all of the Surplus Notes waive any past default or Event of Default, and its consequences, except a default (a) in the payment of principal of, or premium, if any, or interest on any of the Surplus Notes, (b) in respect of covenants or provisions hereof which cannot be modified or amended without the consent of the Holder of each Surplus Note affected, or (c) a default of the covenants contained in Section 3.07. Upon any such waiver, the default covered thereby shall be deemed to be cured for all purposes of this Indenture and the Company, the Trustee and the Holders of Surplus Notes shall be restored to their former positions and rights hereunder, respectively; but no such waiver shall extend to any subsequent or other default or impair any right consequent thereon. Whenever any default or Event of Default hereunder shall have been waived as permitted by this Section 5.07, said default or Event of Default shall for all purposes of the Surplus Notes and this Indenture be deemed to have been cured and to be not continuing.
 
SECTION 5.08 Notice of Defaults.
 
The Trustee shall, within 60 days after the occurrence of a default with respect to the Surplus Notes, mail to all Securityholders, as the names and addresses of such Holders appear upon the Surplus Note Register, notice of all defaults known to the Trustee, unless such defaults shall have been cured before the giving of such notice (the term “defaults” for the purpose of this Section 5.08 being hereby defined to be the events specified in clauses (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e) of Section 5.01, not including periods of grace, if any, provided for therein, and irrespective of the giving of any written notice provided for therein); and provided that, except in the case of default in the payment of the principal of, or premium, if any, or interest on any of the Surplus Notes, the Trustee shall be protected in withholding such notice if and so long as the board of directors, the executive committee, or a trust committee of directors and/or Responsible Officers of the Trustee in good faith determines that the withholding of such notice is in the interests of the Securityholders, and provided further, that in the case of any default of the character specified in Section 5.01(c), no such notice to Securityholders shall be given until at least 60 days after the Trustee has notified the Company of such occurrence but shall be given within 90 days after such occurrence.
 
29

SECTION 5.09 Undertaking to Pay Costs.
 
All parties to this Indenture agree, and each Holder of any Surplus Note by such Holder’s acceptance thereof shall be deemed to have agreed, that any court may in its discretion require, in any suit for the enforcement of any right or remedy under this Indenture, or in any suit against the Trustee for any action taken or omitted by it as Trustee, the filing by any party litigant in such suit of an undertaking to pay the costs of such suit, and that such court may in its discretion assess reasonable costs, including reasonable attorneys’ fees and expenses, against any party litigant in such suit, having due regard to the merits and good faith of the claims or defenses made by such party litigant; but the provisions of this Section 5.09 shall not apply to any suit instituted by the Trustee, to any suit instituted by any Securityholder, or group of Securityholders, holding in the aggregate 10% or more in aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Notes outstanding, or to any suit instituted by any Securityholder for the enforcement of the payment of the principal of (or premium, if any) or interest on any Surplus Note against the Company on or after the same shall have become due and payable.
 
SECTION 5.10 Delay or Omission Not Waiver.
 
No delay or omission of the Trustee or any Holder of Surplus Notes to exercise any right or remedy accruing upon any Event of Default shall impair any such right or remedy or constitute a waiver of any such Event of Default or an acquiescence therein. Every right and remedy given by this Article V or by law to the Trustee or to the Holders may be exercised from time to time, and as often as may be deemed expedient, by the Trustee or the Holders.
 
ARTICLE VI
CONCERNING THE TRUSTEE
 
SECTION 6.01 Duties and Responsibilities of Trustee.
 
With respect to the Holders of Surplus Notes issued hereunder, the Trustee, prior to the occurrence of an Event of Default and after the curing or waiving of all Events of Default which may have occurred, undertakes to perform such duties and only such duties as are specifically set forth in this Indenture. In case an Event of Default has occurred (which has not been cured or waived) the Trustee shall exercise such of the rights and powers vested in it by this Indenture, and use the same degree of care and skill in their exercise, as a prudent person would exercise or use under the circumstances in the conduct of such person’s affairs.
 
No provision of this Indenture shall be construed to relieve the Trustee from liability for its own negligent action, its own negligent failure to act or its own willful misconduct, except that:
 
(a) prior to the occurrence of an Event of Default and after the curing or waiving of all Events of Default which may have occurred
 
(1) the duties and obligations of the Trustee with respect to the Surplus Notes shall be determined solely by the express provisions of this Indenture, and the Trustee shall not be liable except for the performance of such duties and obligations with respect to the Surplus Notes as are specifically set forth in this Indenture, and no implied covenants or obligations shall be read into this Indenture against the Trustee; and
 
30

(2) in the absence of bad faith on the part of the Trustee, the Trustee may conclusively rely, as to the truth of the statements and the correctness of the opinions expressed therein, upon any certificates or opinions furnished to the Trustee and conforming to the requirements of this Indenture; but, in the case of any such certificates or opinions which by any provision hereof are specifically required to be furnished to the Trustee, the Trustee shall be under a duty to examine the same to determine whether or not they conform to the requirements of this Indenture;
 
(b) the Trustee shall not be liable for any error of judgment made in good faith by a Responsible Officer of the Trustee, unless it shall be proved that the Trustee was negligent in ascertaining the pertinent facts; and
 
(c) the Trustee shall not be liable with respect to any action taken or omitted to be taken by it in good faith, in accordance with the direction of the Securityholders pursuant to Section 5.07, relating to the time, method and place of conducting any proceeding for any remedy available to the Trustee, or exercising any trust or power conferred upon the Trustee, under this Indenture.
 
None of the provisions contained in this Indenture shall require the Trustee to expend or risk its own funds or otherwise incur personal financial liability in the performance of any of its duties or in the exercise of any of its rights or powers, if there is reasonable ground for believing that the repayment of such funds or liability is not reasonably assured to it under the terms of this Indenture or adequate indemnity against such risk is not reasonably assured to it. Whether or not therein expressly so provided, every provision of this Indenture relating to the conduct or affecting the eligibility of affording protection to the Trustee shall be subject to the provisions of this Section 6.01.
 
SECTION 6.02 Reliance on Documents, Opinions, etc.
 
Except as otherwise provided in Section 6.01:
 
(a) the Trustee may conclusively rely and shall be protected in acting or refraining from acting upon any resolution, certificate, statement, instrument, opinion, report, notice, request, consent, order, bond, note, debenture or other paper or document believed by it to be genuine and to have been signed or presented by the proper party or parties;
 
(b) any request, direction, order or demand of the Company mentioned herein shall be sufficiently evidenced by an Officers’ Certificate (unless other evidence in respect thereof be herein specifically prescribed); and any Board Resolution may be evidenced to the Trustee by a copy thereof certified by the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary of the Company;
 
(c) the Trustee may consult with counsel of its selection, and any advice or Opinion of Counsel shall be full and complete authorization and protection in respect of any action taken, suffered or omitted by it hereunder in good faith and in accordance with such advice or Opinion of Counsel;
 
31

(d) the Trustee shall be under no obligation to exercise any of the rights or powers vested in it by this Indenture at the request, order or direction of any of the Securityholders, pursuant to the provisions of this Indenture, unless such Securityholders shall have offered to the Trustee security or indemnity satisfactory to the Trustee against the costs, expenses and liabilities which may be incurred therein or thereby;
 
(e) the Trustee shall not be liable for any action taken or omitted by it in good faith and believed by it to be authorized or within the discretion or rights or powers conferred upon it by this Indenture; nothing contained herein shall, however, relieve the Trustee of the obligation, upon the occurrence of an Event of Default (that has not been cured or waived) to exercise with respect to Surplus Notes such of the rights and powers vested in it by this Indenture, and to use the same degree of care and skill in their exercise, as a prudent person would exercise or use under the circumstances in the conduct of such person’s own affairs;
 
(f) the Trustee shall not be bound to make any investigation into the facts or matters stated in any resolution, certificate, statement, instrument, opinion, report, notice, request, consent, order, approval, bond, debenture, coupon or other paper or document, unless requested in writing to do so by the Holders of not less than a majority in principal amount of the outstanding Surplus Notes; provided, however, that if the payment within a reasonable time to the Trustee of the costs, expenses or liabilities likely to be incurred by it in the making of such investigation is, in the opinion of the Trustee, not reasonably assured to the Trustee by the security afforded to it by the terms of this Indenture, the Trustee may require indemnity satisfactory to the Trustee against such expense or liability as a condition to so proceeding;
 
(g) the Trustee may execute any of the trusts or powers hereunder or perform any duties hereunder either directly or by or through agents (including any Authenticating Agent), custodians, nominees or attorneys, and the Trustee shall not be responsible for any misconduct or negligence on the part of any such agent or attorney appointed by it with due care;
 
(h) the Trustee shall not be liable for any action taken, suffered, or omitted to be taken by it in good faith and reasonably believed by it to be authorized or within the discretion or rights or powers conferred upon it by this Indenture;
 
(i) the Trustee shall not be deemed to have notice of any Default or Event of Default unless a Responsible Officer of the Trustee has actual knowledge thereof or unless written notice of any event which is in fact such a default is received by the Trustee at the designated corporate trust office of the Trustee, and such notice references the Surplus Notes and this Indenture;
 
(j) the Trustee shall not be deemed to have notice of any Regulatory Interest Limitation, Payment Restriction or Applicable Insurance Laws unless a Responsible Officer of the Trustee has actual knowledge thereof or unless written notice thereof is received by the Trustee at the designated corporate trust office of the Trustee, and such notice references the Surplus Notes and this Indenture;
 
32

(k) the rights, privileges, protections, immunities and benefits given to the Trustee, including, without limitation, its right to be indemnified, are extended to, and shall be enforceable by, the Trustee in each of its capacities hereunder, and to each agent, custodian and other Person employed to act hereunder;
 
(l) the Trustee may request that the Company deliver an Officers’ Certificate setting forth the names of individuals and/or titles of officers authorized at such time to take specified actions pursuant to this Indenture, which Officers’ Certificate may be signed by any person authorized to sign an Officers’ Certificate, including any person specified as so authorized in any such certificate previously delivered and not superseded; and
 
(m) the Trustee shall be under no obligation to institute any suit, or to take any remedial proceeding under this Indenture, or to enter any appearance or in any way defend in any suit in which it may be made defendant, or in the enforcement of any rights and powers hereunder, if the Trustee reasonably believes that it will not be adequately indemnified as provided in this Indenture.
 
SECTION 6.03 No Responsibility for Recitals, etc.
 
The recitals contained herein and in the Surplus Notes (except in the Certificate of Authentication of the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent) shall be taken as the statements of the Company and the Trustee and the Authenticating Agent assume no responsibility for the correctness of the same. The Trustee and the Authenticating Agent make no representations as to the validity or sufficiency of this Indenture or of the Surplus Notes. The Trustee and the Authenticating Agent shall not be accountable for the use or application by the Company of the proceeds of any Surplus Notes authenticated and delivered by the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent in conformity with the provisions of this Indenture.
 
SECTION 6.04 Trustee, Authenticating Agent, Paying Agents, Transfer Agents or Registrar May Own Surplus Notes.
 
The Trustee or any Authenticating Agent or any paying agent or any transfer agent or any Surplus Note registrar, in its individual or any other capacity, may become the owner or pledgee of Surplus Notes with the same rights it would have if it were not Trustee, Authenticating Agent, paying agent, transfer agent or Surplus Note registrar.
 
SECTION 6.05 Moneys to be Held in Trust.
 
Subject to the provisions of Section 11.04, all moneys received by the Trustee or any paying agent shall, until used or applied as herein provided, be held in trust for the purpose for which they were received, but need not be segregated from other funds except to the extent required by law. The Trustee and any paying agent shall be under no liability for interest on any money received by it hereunder except as otherwise agreed in writing with the Company. So long as no Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, all interest allowed on any such moneys shall be paid from time to time to the Company or its order upon the written order of the Company, signed by the Chairman of the Board of Directors (if an executive officer), the President, any Vice President, the Treasurer or any Assistant Treasurer of the Company.
 
33

SECTION 6.06 Compensation and Expenses of Trustee.
 
The Company covenants and agrees to pay to the Trustee from time to time, and the Trustee shall be entitled to, such compensation as shall be agreed in writing between the Company and the Trustee (which shall not be limited by any provision of law in regard to the compensation of a trustee of an express trust), and the Company will pay or reimburse the Trustee upon its request for all reasonable expenses, disbursements and advances incurred or made by the Trustee in accordance with any of the provisions of this Indenture (including the reasonable compensation and the expenses and disbursements of its counsel and of all persons not regularly in its employ and any amounts paid by the Trustee to any Authenticating Agent pursuant to Section 6.14) except any such expense, disbursement or advance as may arise from its negligence or bad faith. The Company also covenants to indemnify each of the Trustee and any predecessor Trustee (and its officers, agents, directors and employees) for, and to hold it harmless against, any and all loss, liability, damages, claim, action, suit, cost or expense, including taxes (other than taxes based on the income of the Trustee) of any kind and nature whatsoever incurred without negligence or bad faith on the part of the Trustee and arising out of or in connection with the acceptance or administration of this trust, including the costs and expenses of defending itself against any claim (whether asserted by the Company, a Holder of Surplus Notes or any other Person) of liability in the premises. The obligations of the Company under this Section 6.06 to compensate and indemnify the Trustee and to pay or reimburse the Trustee for expenses, disbursements and advances shall constitute additional indebtedness hereunder, and shall survive the resignation or removal of the Trustee and the termination of this Indenture. Such additional indebtedness shall be secured by a lien prior to that of the Surplus Notes upon all property and funds held or collected by the Trustee as such, except funds held in trust for the benefit of the Holders of particular Surplus Notes.
 
When the Trustee incurs expenses or renders services in connection with an Event of Default specified in Section 5.01(d) or Section 5.01(e), the expenses (including the reasonable charges and expenses of its counsel) and the compensation for the services are intended to constitute expenses of administration under any applicable Federal or State bankruptcy, insolvency or other similar law.
 
The provisions of this Section shall survive the termination of this Indenture.
 
SECTION 6.07 Officers’ Certificate as Evidence.
 
Except as otherwise provided in Sections 6.01 and 6.02, whenever in the administration of the provisions of this Indenture the Trustee shall deem it necessary or desirable that a matter be proved or established prior to taking or omitting any action hereunder, such matter (unless other evidence in respect thereof be herein specifically prescribed) may, in the absence of negligence or bad faith on the part of the Trustee, be deemed to be conclusively proved and established by an Officers’ Certificate delivered to the Trustee, and such certificate, in the absence of negligence or bad faith on the part of the Trustee, shall be full warrant to the Trustee for any action taken or omitted by it under the provisions of this Indenture upon the faith thereof.
 
34

SECTION 6.08 Conflicting Interest of Trustee.
 
If the Trustee has or shall acquire any “conflicting interest” within the meaning of Section 310(b) of the Trust Indenture Act, the Trustee shall either eliminate such interest or resign, to the extent and in the manner provided by, and subject to this Indenture.
 
SECTION 6.09 Eligibility of Trustee.
 
The Trustee hereunder shall at all times be a corporation organized and doing business under the laws of the United States of America or any State or territory thereof or of the District of Columbia or a corporation or other Person permitted to act as trustee by the Commission authorized under such laws to exercise corporate trust powers, having a combined capital and surplus of at least $50,000,000 and subject to supervision or examination by federal, State, territorial or District of Columbia authority. If such corporation publishes reports of condition at least annually, pursuant to law or to the requirements of the aforesaid supervising or examining authority, then for the purposes of this Section 6.09 the combined capital and surplus of such corporation shall be deemed to be its combined capital and surplus as set forth in its most recent report of condition so published.
 
The Company may not, nor may any Person directly or indirectly controlling, controlled by, or under common control with the Company, serve as Trustee.
 
In case at any time the Trustee shall cease to be eligible in accordance with the provisions of this Section 6.09, the Trustee shall resign immediately in the manner and with the effect specified in Section 6.10.
 
SECTION 6.10 Resignation or Removal of Trustee.
 
(a) The Trustee, or any trustee or trustees hereafter appointed, may at any time resign by giving written notice of such resignation to the Company and by mailing notice thereof to the Holders of Surplus Notes at their addresses as they shall appear on the Surplus Note Register. Upon receiving such notice of resignation, the Company shall promptly appoint a successor trustee or trustees by written instrument, in duplicate, executed by order of its Board of Directors, one copy of which instrument shall be delivered to the resigning Trustee and one copy to the successor trustee. If no successor trustee shall have been so appointed and have accepted appointment within 30 days after the mailing of such notice of resignation to the Securityholders, the resigning Trustee may petition, at the expense of the Company, any court of competent jurisdiction for the appointment of a successor trustee, or any Securityholder who has been a bona fide Holder of a Surplus Note or Surplus Notes for at least six months may, subject to the provisions of Section 5.09, on behalf of himself or herself and all others similarly situated, petition any such court for the appointment of a successor trustee. Such court may thereupon, after such notice, if any, as it may deem proper and prescribe, appoint a successor Trustee.
 
(b) In case at any time any of the following shall occur:
 
(i) the Trustee shall fail to comply with the provisions of Section 6.08 after written request therefor by the Company or by any Securityholder who has been a bona fide Holder of a Surplus Note or Surplus Notes for at least six months, or
 
35

(ii) the Trustee shall cease to be eligible in accordance with the provisions of Section 6.09 and shall fail to resign after written request therefor by the Company or by any such Securityholder, or
 
(iii) the Trustee shall become incapable of acting, or shall be adjudged a bankrupt or insolvent, or a receiver of the Trustee or of its property shall be appointed, or any public officer shall take charge or control of the Trustee or of its property or affairs for the purpose of rehabilitation, conservation or liquidation,
 
then, in any such case, the Company may remove the Trustee and appoint a successor trustee by written instrument, in duplicate, executed by order of the Board of Directors, one copy of which instrument shall be delivered to the Trustee so removed and one copy to the successor trustee, or, subject to the provisions of Section 5.09, any Securityholder who has been a bona fide Holder of a Surplus Note or Surplus Notes for at least six months may, on behalf of himself or herself and all others similarly situated, petition any court of competent jurisdiction for the removal of the Trustee and the appointment of a successor trustee. Such court may thereupon, after such notice, if any, as it may deem proper and prescribe, remove the Trustee and appoint a successor trustee.
 
(c) The Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Notes at the time outstanding may at any time remove the Trustee and nominate a successor trustee which shall be deemed appointed as successor trustee unless within 10 days after such nomination the Company objects thereto, in which case the Trustee so removed or any Securityholder, upon the terms and conditions and otherwise as provided in subsection (a) of this Section 6.10, may petition, at the expense of the Company, any court of competent jurisdiction for an appointment of a successor trustee.
 
(d) Any resignation or removal of the Trustee and appointment of a successor trustee pursuant to any of the provisions of this Section 6.10 shall become effective upon acceptance of appointment by the successor trustee as provided in Section 6.11.
 
SECTION 6.11 Acceptance by Successor Trustee.
 
Any successor trustee appointed as provided in Section 6.10 shall execute, acknowledge and deliver to the Company and to its predecessor trustee an instrument accepting such appointment hereunder, and thereupon the resignation or removal of the retiring trustee shall become effective and such successor trustee, without any further act, deed or conveyance, shall become vested with all the rights, powers, duties and obligations with respect to the Surplus Notes of its predecessor hereunder, with like effect as if originally named as trustee herein; but, nevertheless, on the written request of the Company or of the successor trustee, the trustee ceasing to act shall, upon payment of any amounts then due it pursuant to the provisions of Section 6.06, execute and deliver an instrument transferring to such successor trustee all the rights and powers of the trustee so ceasing to act and shall duly assign, transfer and deliver to such successor trustee all property and money held by such retiring trustee thereunder. Upon request of any such successor trustee, the Company shall execute any and all instruments in writing for more fully and certainly vesting in and confirming to such successor trustee all such rights and powers. Any trustee ceasing to act shall, nevertheless, retain a lien upon all property or funds held or collected by such trustee to secure any amounts then due it pursuant to the provisions of Section 6.06.
 
36

No successor trustee shall accept appointment as provided in this Section 6.11 unless at the time of such acceptance such successor trustee shall be qualified under the provisions of Section 6.08 and eligible under the provisions of Section 6.09.
 
Upon acceptance of appointment by a successor trustee as provided in this Section 6.11, the Company shall mail notice of the succession of such trustee hereunder to the Holders of Surplus Notes at their addresses as they shall appear on the Surplus Note Register. If the Company fails to mail such notice within 10 days after the acceptance of appointment by the successor trustee, the successor trustee shall cause such notice to be mailed at the expense of the Company.
 
SECTION 6.12 Succession by Merger, etc.
 
Any corporation into which the Trustee may be merged or converted or with which it may be consolidated, or any corporation resulting from any merger, conversion or consolidation to which the Trustee shall be a party, or any corporation succeeding to all or substantially all of the corporate trust business of the Trustee, shall be the successor of the Trustee hereunder without the execution or filing of any paper or any further act on the part of any of the parties hereto; provided that such corporation shall be qualified under the provisions of Section 6.08 and eligible under the provisions of Section 6.09 hereto.
 
In case at the time such successor to the Trustee shall succeed to the trusts created by this Indenture any of the Surplus Notes shall have been authenticated but not delivered, any such successor to the Trustee may adopt the certificate of authentication of any predecessor trustee, and deliver such Surplus Notes so authenticated; and in case at that time any of the Surplus Notes shall not have been authenticated, any successor to the Trustee may authenticate such Surplus Notes either in the name of any predecessor hereunder or in the name of the successor trustee; and in all such cases such certificates shall have the full force which it is anywhere in the Surplus Notes or in this Indenture provided that the certificate of the Trustee shall have; provided, however, that the right to adopt the certificate of authentication of any predecessor Trustee or authenticate Surplus Notes in the name of any predecessor Trustee shall apply only to its successor or successors by merger, conversion or consolidation.
 
SECTION 6.13 Authenticating Agents.
 
There may be one or more Authenticating Agents appointed by the Trustee upon the request of the Company with power to act on its behalf and subject to its direction in the authentication and delivery of Surplus Notes issued upon exchange or transfer thereof as fully to all intents and purposes as though any such Authenticating Agent had been expressly authorized to authenticate and deliver Surplus Notes; provided, that the Trustee shall have no liability to the Company for any acts or omissions of the Authenticating Agent with respect to the authentication and delivery of Surplus Notes, except to the extent that such act was taken or any such omission was made upon the explicit written direction of the Trustee. Any such Authenticating Agent shall at all times be a corporation organized and doing business under the laws of the United States or of any State or territory thereof or of the District of Columbia authorized under such laws to act as Authenticating Agent, having a combined capital and surplus of at least $5,000,000 and being subject to supervision or examination by Federal, State, territorial or District of Columbia authority. If such corporation publishes reports of condition at least annually pursuant to law or the requirements of such authority, then for the purposes of this Section 6.13 the combined capital and surplus of such corporation shall be deemed to be its combined capital and surplus as set forth in its most recent report of condition so published. If at any time an Authenticating Agent shall cease to be eligible in accordance with the provisions of this Section, it shall resign immediately in the manner and with the effect herein specified in this Section.
 
37

Any corporation into which any Authenticating Agent may be merged or converted or with which it may be consolidated, or any corporation resulting from any merger, consolidation or conversion to which any Authenticating Agent shall be a party, or any corporation succeeding to all or substantially all of the corporate trust business of any Authenticating Agent, shall be the successor of such Authenticating Agent hereunder, if such successor corporation is otherwise eligible under this Section 6.13 without the execution or filing of any paper or any further act on the part of the parties hereto or such Authenticating Agent.
 
Any Authenticating Agent may at any time resign by giving written notice of resignation to the Trustee and to the Company. The Trustee may at any time terminate the agency of any Authenticating Agent by giving written notice of termination to such Authenticating Agent and to the Company. Upon receiving such a notice of resignation or upon such a termination, or in case at any time any Authenticating Agent shall cease to be eligible under this Section 6.13, the Trustee may, and upon the request of the Company shall, promptly appoint a successor Authenticating Agent eligible under this Section 6.13, shall give written notice of such appointment to the Company and shall mail notice of such appointment to all Holders of the Surplus Notes as the names and addresses of such Holders appear on the Surplus Note Register. Any successor Authenticating Agent upon acceptance of its appointment hereunder shall become vested with all rights, powers, duties and responsibilities of its predecessor hereunder, with like effect as if originally named as Authenticating Agent herein.
 
The Company agrees to pay to any Authenticating Agent from time to time reasonable compensation for its services. Any Authenticating Agent shall have no responsibility or liability for any action taken by it as such in accordance with the directions of the Trustee.
 
ARTICLE VII
CONCERNING THE SECURITYHOLDERS
 
SECTION 7.01 Action by Securityholders.
 
Whenever in this Indenture it is provided that the Holders of a specified percentage in aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Notes may take any action (including the making of any demand or request, the giving of any notice, consent or waiver or the taking of any other action) the fact that at the time of taking any such action the Holders of such specified percentage have joined therein may be evidenced (a) by any instrument or any number of instruments of similar tenor executed by such Securityholders in person or by agent or proxy appointed in writing, or (b) by the record of such Holders of Surplus Notes voting in favor thereof at any meeting of such Securityholders duly called and held in accordance with the provisions of Article VIII hereof, or (c) by a combination of such instrument or instruments and any such record of such a meeting of such Securityholders.
 
38

If the Company shall solicit from the Securityholders any request, demand, authorization, direction, notice, consent, waiver or other action, the Company may, at its option, as evidenced by an Officers’ Certificate, fix in advance a record date for the determination of Securityholders entitled to give such request, demand, authorization, direction, notice, consent, waiver or other action, but the Company shall have no obligation to do so. If such a record date is fixed, such request, demand, authorization, direction, notice, consent, waiver or other action may be given before or after the record date, but only the Securityholders of record at the close of business on the record date shall be deemed to be Securityholders for the purposes of determining whether Securityholders of the requisite proportion of outstanding Surplus Notes have authorized or agreed or consented to such request, demand, authorization, direction, notice, consent, waiver or other action, and for that purpose the outstanding Surplus Notes shall be computed as of the record date; provided, however, that no such authorization, agreement or consent by such Securityholders on the record date shall be deemed effective unless it shall become effective pursuant to the provisions of this Indenture not later than six months after the record date.
 
SECTION 7.02 Proof of Execution by Securityholders.
 
Subject to the provisions of Sections 6.01, 6.02 and 8.05, proof of the execution of any instrument by a Securityholder or his agent or proxy shall be sufficient if made in accordance with such reasonable rules and regulations as may be prescribed by the Trustee or in such manner as shall be satisfactory to the Trustee. The ownership of Surplus Notes shall be proved by the Surplus Note Register or by a certificate of the Surplus Note registrar. The Trustee may require such additional proof of any matter referred to in this Section as it shall deem necessary.
 
The record of any Securityholders’ meeting shall be proved in the manner provided in Section 8.06.
 
SECTION 7.03 Who Are Deemed Absolute Owners.
 
Prior to due presentment for registration of transfer of any Surplus Note, the Company, the Trustee, any Authenticating Agent, any paying agent, any transfer agent and any Surplus Note registrar may deem the person in whose name such Surplus Note shall be registered upon the Surplus Note Register to be, and may treat such person as, the absolute owner of such Surplus Note (whether or not such Surplus Note shall be overdue) for the purpose of receiving payment of or on account of the principal of, and premium, if any, and interest on such Surplus Note and for all other purposes; and none of the Company, the Trustee, any Authenticating Agent, any paying agent, any transfer agent or any Surplus Note registrar shall be affected by any notice to the contrary.
 
SECTION 7.04 Surplus Notes Owned by Company Deemed Not Outstanding.
 
In determining whether the Holders of the requisite aggregate principal amount of Surplus Notes have concurred in any direction, consent or waiver under this Indenture, Surplus Notes which are owned by the Company or any other obligor on the Surplus Notes or by any person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by or under direct or indirect common control with the Company or any other obligor on the Surplus Notes shall be disregarded and deemed not to be outstanding for the purpose of any such determination; provided that for the purposes of determining whether the Trustee shall be protected in relying on any such direction, consent or waiver, only Surplus Notes which a Responsible Officer of the Trustee actually knows are so owned shall be so disregarded. Surplus Notes so owned which have been pledged in good faith may be regarded as outstanding for the purposes of this Section 7.04 if the pledgee shall establish to the satisfaction of the Trustee the pledgee’s right to vote such Surplus Notes and that the pledgee is not the Company or any such other obligor or person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by or under direct or indirect common control with the Company or any such other obligor. In the case of a dispute as to such right, any decision by the Trustee taken upon the advice of counsel shall be full protection to the Trustee.
 
39

SECTION 7.05 Revocation of Consents; Future Holders Bound.
 
At any time prior to (but not after) the evidencing to the Trustee, as provided in Section 7.01, of the taking of any action by the Holders of the percentage in aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Note specified in this Indenture in connection with such action, any Holder of a Surplus Note (or any Surplus Note issued in whole or in part in exchange or substitution therefor) the serial number of which is shown by the evidence to be included in the Surplus Notes the Holders of which have consented to such action may, by filing written notice with the Trustee at its Principal Office and upon proof of holding as provided in Section 7.02, revoke such action so far as concerns such Surplus Note (or so far as concerns the principal amount represented by any exchanged or substituted Surplus Note). Except as aforesaid any such action taken by the Holder of any Surplus Note shall be conclusive and binding upon such Holder and upon all future Holders and owners of such Surplus Note, and of any Surplus Note issued in exchange or substitution therefor, irrespective of whether or not any notation in regard thereto is made upon such Surplus Note or any Surplus Note issued in exchange or substitution therefor.
 
ARTICLE VIII
SECURITYHOLDERS’ MEETINGS
 
SECTION 8.01 Purposes of Meetings.
 
A meeting of Securityholders may be called at any time and from time to time pursuant to the provisions of this Article VIII for any of the following purposes:
 
(a) to give any notice to the Company or to the Trustee, or to give any directions to the Trustee, or to consent to the waiving of any default hereunder and its consequences, or to take any other action authorized to be taken by Securityholders pursuant to any of the provisions of Article V hereof;
 
(b) to remove the Trustee and nominate a successor trustee pursuant to the provisions of Article VI hereof;
 
(c) to consent to the execution of an indenture or indentures supplemental hereto pursuant to the provisions of Section 9.02; or
 
40

(d) to take any other action authorized to be taken by or on behalf of the Holders of any specified aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Notes under any other provision of this Indenture or under applicable law.
 
SECTION 8.02 Call of Meetings by Trustee.
 
The Trustee may at any time call a meeting of Securityholders to take any action specified in Section 8.01, to be held at such time and at such place in the Borough of Manhattan, The City of New York, or in Houston, Texas, as the Trustee shall determine. Notice of every meeting of the Securityholders, setting forth the time and the place of such meeting and in general terms the action proposed to be taken at such meeting, shall be mailed to Holders of Surplus Notes at their addresses as they shall appear on the Surplus Notes Register. Such notice shall be mailed not less than 20 nor more than 180 days prior to the date fixed for the meeting.
 
SECTION 8.03 Call of Meetings by Company or Securityholders.
 
In case at any time the Company pursuant to a resolution of the Board of Directors, or the Holders of at least 10% in aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Notes then outstanding, shall have requested the Trustee to call a meeting of Securityholders, by written request setting forth in reasonable detail the action proposed to be taken at the meeting, and the Trustee shall not have mailed the notice of such meeting within 20 days after receipt of such request, then the Company or such Securityholders may determine the time and the place in said Borough of Manhattan, The City of New York, or Houston, Texas for such meeting and may call such meeting to take any action authorized in Section 8.01, by mailing notice thereof as provided in Section 8.02.
 
SECTION 8.04 Qualifications for Voting.
 
To be entitled to vote at any meeting of Securityholders a person shall (a) be a Holder of one or more Surplus Notes or (b) a person appointed by an instrument in writing as proxy by a Holder of one or more such Surplus Notes. The only persons who shall be entitled to be present or to speak at any meeting of Securityholders shall be the persons entitled to vote at such meeting and their counsel and any representatives of the Trustee and its counsel and any representatives of the Company and its counsel.
 
SECTION 8.05 Regulations.
 
Notwithstanding any other provisions of this Indenture, the Trustee may make such reasonable regulations as it may deem advisable for any meeting of Securityholders, in regard to proof of the holding of Surplus Notes and of the appointment of proxies, and in regard to the appointment and duties of inspectors of votes, the submission and examination of proxies, certificates and other evidence of the right to vote, and such other matters concerning the conduct of the meeting as it shall think fit.
 
The Trustee shall, by an instrument in writing, appoint a temporary chair of the meeting, unless the meeting shall have been called by the Company or by Securityholders as provided in Section 8.03, in which case the Company or the Securityholders calling the meeting, as the case may be, shall in like manner appoint a temporary chair. A permanent chair and a permanent secretary of the meeting shall be elected by majority vote of the meeting.
 
41

Subject to the provisions of Section 7.04, at any meeting of Securityholders, each Holder of Surplus Notes with respect to which such meeting is being held or proxy therefor shall be entitled to one vote for each $1,000 principal amount of Surplus Notes held or represented by such Holder; provided, however, that no vote shall be cast or counted at any meeting in respect of any Surplus Note challenged as not outstanding and ruled by the chair of the meeting to be not outstanding. The chair of the meeting shall have no right to vote other than by virtue of Surplus Notes held by him or her or instruments in writing as aforesaid duly designating him or her as the person to vote on behalf of other Securityholders. Any meeting of Securityholders duly called pursuant to the provisions of Section 8.02 or 8.03 may be adjourned from time to time by a majority of those present, whether or not constituting a quorum, and the meeting may be held as so adjourned without further notice.
 
SECTION 8.06 Voting.
 
The vote upon any resolution submitted to any meeting of Holders of Surplus Notes shall be by written ballots on which shall be subscribed the signatures of such Holders or of their representatives by proxy and the serial number or numbers of the Surplus Notes held or represented by them. The permanent chair of the meeting shall appoint two inspectors of votes who shall count all votes cast at the meeting for or against any resolution and who shall make and file with the secretary of the meeting their verified written reports in triplicate of all votes cast at the meeting. A record in duplicate of the proceedings of each meeting of Securityholders shall be prepared by the secretary of the meeting and there shall be attached to said record the original reports of the inspectors of votes on any vote by ballot taken thereat and affidavits by one or more persons having knowledge of the facts setting forth a copy of the notice of the meeting and showing that said notice was mailed as provided in Section 8.02. The record shall show the serial numbers of the Surplus Notes voting in favor of or against any resolution. The record shall be signed and verified by the affidavits of the permanent chair and secretary of the meeting and one of the duplicates shall be delivered to the Company and the other to the Trustee to be preserved by the Trustee, the latter to have attached thereto the ballots voted at the meeting.
 
Any record so signed and verified shall be conclusive evidence of the matters therein stated.
 
Any action of the Holders of Surplus Notes may be taken at a meeting by vote of a majority of the Holders of Surplus Notes present (whether in person or by telephone and eligible to vote with respect to such matter or without a meeting by the unanimous written consent of the Holders of Surplus Notes. In the event there is only one Holders of Surplus Notes, any and all action of such Holders of Surplus Notes shall be evidenced by a written consent of such Holders of Surplus Notes.
 
42

ARTICLE IX
SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURES
 
SECTION 9.01 Supplemental Indentures without Consent of Securityholders.
 
The Company and the Trustee may from time to time and at any time, subject to applicable regulatory compliance, including obtaining any required approvals or consents of the Applicable Regulatory Authority, enter into an indenture or indentures supplemental hereto (which shall conform to the provisions of the Trust Indenture Act as then in effect applicable to indentures qualified thereunder), without the consent of the Securityholders, for one or more of the following purposes:
 
(a) to evidence the succession of another entity to the Company, or successive successions, and the assumption by the successor entity of the covenants, agreements and obligations of the Company pursuant to Article X hereof;
 
(b) to add to the covenants of the Company such further covenants, restrictions or conditions for the protection of the Holders of Surplus Notes as the Board of Directors and the Trustee shall consider to be for the protection of the Holders of Surplus Notes, and to make the occurrence, or the occurrence and continuance, of a default in any of such additional covenants, restrictions or conditions a default or an Event of Default permitting the enforcement of all or any of the several remedies provided in this Indenture as herein set forth; provided, however, that in respect of any such additional covenant, restriction or condition such supplemental indenture may provide for a particular period of grace after default (which period may be shorter or longer than that allowed in the case of other defaults) or may provide for an immediate enforcement upon such default or may limit the remedies available to the Trustee upon such default;
 
(c) to cure any ambiguity or to correct or supplement any provision contained herein or in any supplemental indenture which may be defective or inconsistent with any other provision contained herein or in any supplemental indenture, or to make such other provisions in regard to matters or questions arising under this Indenture; provided that any such action shall not adversely affect the interests of the Holders of the Surplus Notes in any material respect;
 
(d) to add to, delete from, or revise the terms of Surplus Notes, including, without limitation, any terms relating to the issuance, exchange, registration or transfer of Surplus Notes; provided, that no such action shall adversely affect the interests of Holders of outstanding Surplus Notes;
 
(e) to evidence and provide for the acceptance of appointment hereunder by a successor trustee with respect to the Surplus Notes and to add to or change any of the provisions of this Indenture as shall be necessary to provide for or facilitate the administration of the trusts hereunder by more than one trustee, pursuant to the requirements of Section 6.11;
 
(f) to make any change that does not adversely affect the rights of any Securityholder in any material respect; or
 
43

(g) to provide for the issuance of and establish the form and terms and conditions of the Surplus Notes, to establish the form of any certifications required to be furnished pursuant to the terms of this Indenture, or to add to the rights of the Holders of Surplus Notes.
 
The Trustee is hereby authorized to join with the Company in the execution of any such supplemental indenture, to make any further appropriate agreements and stipulations which may be therein contained and to accept the conveyance, transfer and assignment of any property thereunder, but the Trustee shall not be obligated to, but may in its discretion, enter into any such supplemental indenture which affects the Trustee’s own rights, duties or immunities under this Indenture or otherwise.
 
Any supplemental indenture authorized by the provisions of this Section 9.01 may be executed by the Company and the Trustee without the consent of the Holders of any of the Surplus Notes at the time outstanding, notwithstanding any of the provisions of Section 9.02.
 
SECTION 9.02 Supplemental Indentures with Consent of Securityholders.
 
With the consent (evidenced as provided in Section 7.01) of the Holders of a majority in aggregate principal amount of the Surplus Notes at the time outstanding, the Company, when authorized by a Board Resolution, and the Trustee may from time to time and at any time, subject to applicable regulatory compliance, including obtaining any required approvals or consents of the Applicable Regulatory Authority, enter into an indenture or indentures supplemental hereto (which shall conform to the provisions of the Trust Indenture Act then in effect applicable to indentures qualified thereunder) for the purpose of adding any provisions to or changing in any manner or eliminating any of the provisions of this Indenture or of any supplemental indenture or of modifying in any manner the rights of the Holders of the Surplus Notes; provided, however, that no such supplemental indenture shall, without the consent of the Holders of each Surplus Note, (i) change the Stated Maturity of any such Surplus Note, or reduce the rate (or change the manner of calculation of the rate) or change any date on which interest thereon is payable, or reduce the principal amount thereof or any premium thereon, or change any redemption or repayment date or period or price, or make the principal thereof or any interest or premium thereon payable in any coin or currency other than that provided in the Surplus Notes, or impair or affect the right of any Securityholder to institute suit for payment thereof, (ii) reduce the aforesaid percentage of Surplus Notes the Holders of which are required to consent to any such supplemental indenture or (iii) otherwise materially and adversely affect the interests of the Holders of any such Surplus Note.
 
Upon the request of the Company accompanied by a copy of a resolution of the Board of Directors certified by its Secretary or Assistant Secretary authorizing the execution of any such supplemental indenture, and upon the filing with the Trustee of evidence of the consent of Securityholders as aforesaid, the Trustee shall join with the Company in the execution of such supplemental indenture unless such supplemental indenture affects the Trustee’s own rights, duties or immunities under this Indenture or otherwise, in which case the Trustee may in its discretion, but shall not be obligated to, enter into such supplemental indenture. The Trustee may receive an Opinion of Counsel as conclusive evidence that any supplemental indenture executed pursuant to this Article is authorized or permitted by, and conforms to, the terms of this Article and that it is proper for the Trustee under the provisions of this Article to join in the execution thereof.
 
44

Promptly after the execution by the Company and the Trustee of any supplemental indenture pursuant to the provisions of this Section, the Trustee shall transmit by mail, first class postage prepaid, a notice, to be prepared by the Company, setting forth in general terms the substance of such supplemental indenture, to the Securityholders as their names and addresses appear upon the Surplus Note Register. Any failure of the Trustee to mail such notice, or any defect therein, shall not, however, in any way impair or affect the validity of any such supplemental indenture.
 
It shall not be necessary for the consent of the Securityholders under this Section 9.02 to approve the particular form of any proposed supplemental indenture, but it shall be sufficient if such consent shall approve the substance thereof.
 
SECTION 9.03 Notation on Surplus Notes.
 
Surplus Notes authenticated and delivered after the execution of any supplemental indenture affecting the Surplus Notes pursuant to the provisions of this Article IX may bear a notation in form approved by the Company as to any matter provided for in such supplemental indenture. If the Company shall so determine, new Surplus Notes so modified as to conform, in the opinion of the Company, to any modification of this Indenture contained in any such supplemental indenture may be prepared and executed by the Company, authenticated by the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent and delivered in exchange for the Surplus Notes then outstanding.
 
SECTION 9.04 Evidence of Compliance of Supplemental Indenture to be Furnished to Trustee.
 
The Trustee, subject to the provisions of Sections 6.01 and 6.02, may receive an Officers’ Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel as conclusive evidence that any supplemental indenture executed pursuant hereto complies with the requirements of this Article IX.
 
ARTICLE X
CONSOLIDATION, MERGER, SALE, CONVEYANCE AND LEASE
 
SECTION 10.01 Company May Consolidate, etc., on Certain Terms.
 
Nothing contained in this Indenture or in any of the Surplus Notes shall prevent any consolidation or merger of the Company with or into any other Person (whether or not affiliated with the Company, as the case may be), or successive consolidations or mergers in which the Company or its successor or successors, as the case may be, shall be a party or parties, or shall prevent any sale, conveyance, transfer or lease of the property of the Company, or its successor or successors, as the case may be, as an entirety, or substantially as an entirety, to any other Person (whether or not affiliated with the Company or its successor or successors, as the case may be) authorized to acquire and operate the same or prevent any conversion of the Company from a stock insurance company to any other form of entity (any such action a “Conversion”); provided, that (a) the Company is the surviving entity, or the entity formed by or surviving any such consolidation, merger or Conversion (if other than the Company) or to which such sale, conveyance, transfer or lease of property is made is a corporation, partnership, trust or other entity organized and existing under the laws of the United States or any State thereof or the District of Columbia, (b) if the Company is not the surviving entity, upon any such consolidation, merger, Conversion, sale, conveyance, transfer or lease, the due and punctual payment of the principal of and interest on the Surplus Notes according to their tenor, and the due and punctual performance and observance of all the covenants and conditions of this Indenture to be kept or performed by the Company shall be expressly assumed by the surviving entity, by supplemental indenture (which shall conform to the provisions of the Trust Indenture Act as then in effect applicable to indentures qualified thereunder) satisfactory in form to the Trustee executed and delivered to the Trustee by the entity formed by such consolidation or Conversion, or into which the Company shall have been merged, or by the entity which shall have acquired such property, as the case may be, (c) after giving effect to such consolidation, merger, Conversion, sale, conveyance, transfer or lease, no Default or Event of Default shall have occurred and be continuing, (d) immediately after such transaction, the successor entity, as applicable, shall have an A.M. Best financial strength rating equal to or higher than the rating assigned to the Company immediately prior to the transaction; and (e) the Payment Restrictions to which the successor entity, as applicable, is subject following such transaction, based on its jurisdiction of domicile or otherwise, shall not be materially more restrictive than those to which the Company was subject upon original issuance of the Surplus Notes.
 
45

SECTION 10.02 Successor Entity to be Substituted for Company.
 
In case of any such consolidation, merger, Conversion, conveyance or transfer and upon the assumption by the successor entity, by supplemental indenture, executed and delivered to the Trustee and satisfactory in form to the Trustee, of the due and punctual payment of the principal of and premium, if any, and interest on all of the Surplus Notes and the due and punctual performance and observance of all of the covenants and conditions of this Indenture to be performed or observed by the Company, such successor entity shall succeed to and be substituted for the Company, with the same effect as if it had been named herein as the party of the first part, and the Company thereupon shall be relieved of any further liability or obligation hereunder or upon the Surplus Notes. Such successor entity thereupon may cause to be signed, and may issue either in its own name or in the name of the Company, any or all of the Surplus Notes issuable hereunder which theretofore shall not have been signed by the Company and delivered to the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent; and, upon the order of such successor entity instead of the Company and subject to all the terms, conditions and limitations in this Indenture prescribed, the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent shall authenticate and deliver any Surplus Notes which previously shall have been signed and delivered by the officers of the Company to the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent for authentication, and any Surplus Notes which such successor entity thereafter shall cause to be signed and delivered to the Trustee or the Authenticating Agent for that purpose. All the Surplus Notes so issued shall in all respects have the same legal rank and benefit under this Indenture as the Surplus Notes theretofore or thereafter issued in accordance with the terms of this Indenture as though all of such Indentures had been issued at the date of the execution hereof.
 
SECTION 10.03 Opinion of Counsel to be Given to Trustee.
 
The Trustee, subject to the provisions of Sections 6.01 and 6.02, may receive an Opinion of Counsel as conclusive evidence that any consolidation, merger, Conversion, conveyance or transfer, and any assumption, permitted or required by the terms of this Article X complies with the provisions of this Article X.
 
46

ARTICLE XI
SATISFACTION AND DISCHARGE OF INDENTURE
 
SECTION 11.01 Discharge of Indenture.
 
When (a) the Company shall deliver to the Trustee for cancellation all Surplus Notes theretofore authenticated (other than any Surplus Notes which shall have been destroyed, lost or stolen and which shall have been replaced or paid as provided in Section 2.08) and not theretofore cancelled or (b) all the Surplus Notes not theretofore cancelled or delivered to the Trustee for cancellation shall have become due and payable, or are by their terms to become due and payable within one year or are to be called for redemption within one year under arrangements satisfactory to the Trustee for the giving of notice of redemption, and the Company shall deposit with the Trustee, in trust, immediately available funds sufficient to pay at maturity or upon redemption all of the Surplus Notes (other than any Surplus Notes which shall have been destroyed, lost or stolen and which shall have been replaced or paid as provided in Section 2.08) not theretofore cancelled or delivered to the Trustee for cancellation, including principal of, premium, if any, and interest due or to become due to such date of maturity or redemption date, as the case may be, but excluding, however, the amount of any moneys for the payment of principal of, and premium, if any, or interest on the Surplus Notes (1) theretofore repaid to the Company in accordance with the provisions of Section 11.04, or (2) paid to any State or to the District of Columbia pursuant to its unclaimed property or similar laws, and if, in either case, the Company shall also pay or cause to be paid all other sums payable hereunder by the Company, then this Indenture shall cease to be of further effect, except that the provisions of Sections 2.05, 2.07, 2.08, 3.01, 3.02, 3.03, 3.05, 6.06, 6.10 and 11.04 hereof shall survive until such Surplus Notes shall mature and be paid. Thereafter, Sections 6.06 and 11.04 shall survive, and the Trustee, on demand of the Company accompanied by any Officers’ Certificate and an Opinion of Counsel and at the cost and expense of the Company, shall execute proper instruments acknowledging satisfaction of and discharging this Indenture, the Company, however, hereby agreeing to reimburse the Trustee for any costs or expenses thereafter reasonably and properly incurred by the Trustee in connection with this Indenture or the Surplus Notes.
 
SECTION 11.02 Deposited Moneys to be Held in Trust by Trustee.
 
Subject to the provisions of Section 11.04, all moneys deposited with the Trustee pursuant to Section 11.01 shall be held in trust and applied by it to the payment, either directly or through any paying agent (including the Company if acting as its own paying agent), to the Holders of the particular Surplus Notes for the payment of which such moneys have been deposited with the Trustee, of all sums due and to become due thereon for principal, premium, if any, and interest.
 
47

SECTION 11.03 Paying Agent to Repay Moneys Held.
 
Upon the satisfaction and discharge of this Indenture all moneys then held by any paying agent of the Surplus Notes (other than the Trustee) shall, upon written demand of the Company, be repaid to it or paid to the Trustee, and thereupon such paying agent shall be released from all further liability with respect to such moneys.
 
SECTION 11.04 Return of Unclaimed Moneys.
 
Any moneys deposited with or paid to the Trustee or any paying agent for payment of the principal of, and premium, if any, or interest on Surplus Notes and not applied but remaining unclaimed by the Holders of Surplus Notes for two years after the date upon which the principal of, and premium, if any, or interest on such Surplus Notes, as the case may be, shall have become due and payable, shall be repaid to the Company by the Trustee or such paying agent on written demand; and the Holder of any of the Surplus Notes shall thereafter look only to the Company for any payment which such Holder may be entitled to collect and all liability of the Trustee or such paying agent with respect to such moneys shall thereupon cease.
 
ARTICLE XII
IMMUNITY OF INCORPORATORS, STOCKHOLDERS,
MEMBERS, PARTNERS, OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS
 
SECTION 12.01 Indenture and Surplus Notes Solely Entity Obligations.
 
No recourse for the payment of the principal of or premium, if any, or interest on any Surplus Note, or for any claim based thereon or otherwise in respect thereof, and no recourse under or upon any obligation, covenant or agreement of the Company in this Indenture or in any supplemental indenture, or in any Surplus Note, or because of the creation of any indebtedness represented thereby, shall be had against any incorporator, stockholder, member, partner, officer or director, as such, past, present or future, of the Company or of any successor entity of the Company, either directly or through the Company or any successor entity of the Company, whether by virtue of any constitution, statute or rule of law, or by the enforcement of any assessment or penalty or otherwise; it being expressly understood that all such liability is hereby expressly waived and released as a condition of, and as a consideration for, the execution of this Indenture and the issue of the Surplus Notes.
 
ARTICLE XIII
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
 
SECTION 13.01 Successors.
 
All the covenants, stipulations, promises and agreements in this Indenture made by the Company and the Trustee shall bind its successors and assigns whether so expressed or not.
 
SECTION 13.02 Official Acts by Successor Entity.
 
Any act or proceeding by any provision of this Indenture authorized or required to be done or performed by any board, committee or officer of the Company shall and may be done and performed with like force and effect by the like board, committee or officer of any entity that shall at the time be the lawful sole successor of the Company.
 
48

SECTION 13.03 Surrender of Company Powers.
 
The Company by instrument in writing executed by authority of at least 2/3 (two-thirds) of its Board of Directors and delivered to the Trustee may surrender any of the powers reserved to the Company, and thereupon such power so surrendered shall terminate both as to the Company and as to any successor entity.
 
SECTION 13.04 Addresses for Notices, etc.
 
Any notice or demand which by any provision of this Indenture is required or permitted to be given or served by the Trustee or by the Holders of Surplus Notes on the Company may be given or served by being deposited postage prepaid by first class mail in a post office letter box addressed (until another address is filed by the Company with the Trustee for the purpose) to the Company, 380 Sentry Parkway, Blue Bell, Pennsylvania, Attention: William E. Hitselberger. Any notice, direction, request or demand by any Securityholder to or upon the Trustee shall be deemed to have been sufficiently given or made, for all purposes, if given or made in writing at the office of the Trustee, addressed to the Trustee, JPMorgan Chase Bank, national Association, 600 Travis Street, 50th Floor, Houston, Texas 77002, Attention: Worldwide Securities Services - Pennsylvania Manufacturers’ Association Insurance Company.
 
SECTION 13.05 Governing Law.
 
THIS SURPLUS NOTE SHALL BE GOVERNED BY, AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH, THE LAWS OF THE DOMESTIC LAWS OF THE COMMONWEALTH OF PENNSYLVANIA, WITHOUT REGARD TO CONFLICTS OF LAWS PRINCIPLES THEREOF, UNLESS AND TO THE EXTENT PREEMPTED BY THE LAWS OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA.
 
SECTION 13.06 Submission to Jurisdiction.
 
The Company and the Trustee each irrevocably and unconditionally submits to the nonexclusive jurisdiction of the courts of the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania and the federal courts of the United States located in Philadelphia, Pennsylvania (and any courts having jurisdiction over appeals therefrom) in respect of any action, suit or proceeding arising out of this Indenture or the Surplus Notes or any of the transactions contemplated thereby and waives to the extent permitted by law any objection to venue in respect thereof (based on inconvenient forum or otherwise). Unless the Company or the Trustee, as the case may be, maintains a registered agent in the Commonwealth of Pennsylvania, each such party agrees that process in any such suit may be served by mailing the relevant process, by registered or certified mail, return receipt requested, to the address of such party then specified pursuant to Section 13.04.
 
SECTION 13.07 Evidence of Compliance with Conditions Precedent.
 
Upon any application or demand by the Company to the Trustee to take any action under any of the provisions of this Indenture, the Company shall furnish to the Trustee an Officers’ Certificate stating that in the opinion of the signers all conditions precedent, if any, provided for in this Indenture relating to the proposed action have been complied with and an Opinion of Counsel stating that, in the opinion of such counsel, all such conditions precedent have been complied with.
 
49

Each certificate or opinion provided for in this Indenture and delivered to the Trustee with respect to compliance with a condition or covenant provided for in this Indenture shall include (1) a statement that the person making such certificate or opinion has read such covenant or condition; (2) a brief statement as to the nature and scope of the examination or investigation upon which the statements or opinions contained in such certificate or opinion are based; (3) a statement that, in the opinion of such person, he has made such examination or investigation as is necessary to enable him to express an informed opinion as to whether or not such covenant or condition has been complied with; and (4) a statement as to whether or not, in the opinion of such person, such condition or covenant has been complied with.
 
SECTION 13.08 Table of Contents, Headings, etc.
 
The table of contents and the titles and headings of the articles and sections of this Indenture have been inserted for convenience of reference only, are not to be considered a part hereof, and shall in no way modify or restrict any of the terms or provisions hereof.
 
SECTION 13.09 Execution in Counterparts.
 
This Indenture may be executed in any number of counterparts, each of which shall be an original, but such counterparts shall together constitute but one and the same instrument.
 
SECTION 13.10 Separability.
 
In case any one or more of the provisions contained in this Indenture or in the Surplus Notes shall for any reason be held to be invalid, illegal or unenforceable in any respect, such invalidity, illegality or unenforceability shall not affect any other provisions of this Indenture or of such Surplus Notes, but this Indenture and such Surplus Notes shall be construed as if such invalid or illegal or unenforceable provision had never been contained herein or therein.
 
ARTICLE XIV
REDEMPTION OF SECURITIES
 
SECTION 14.01 Optional Redemption.
 
This Surplus Note is redeemable prior to its Stated Maturity at the option of the Company (i) in whole or in part, from time to time, on or after November 2, 2010 on an Interest Payment Date or (ii) at any time prior to November 2, 2010, in whole but not in part, upon the occurrence and continuation of a Tax Event, in either case at a redemption price (the “Redemption Price”) equal to 100% of the principal amount thereof, plus unpaid interest thereon (including Additional Interest and Compound Interest, if any) accrued to the date of redemption; provided (A) that the Company may not exercise its option to redeem with respect to a Tax Event unless it fixes, not later than 90 days after the occurrence of such Tax Event, a date for such redemption and mails a notice thereof to Holders pursuant to Section 14.02, and (B) that the Company may not exercise its option to redeem with respect to a Tax Event described in clause (i) of the definition of “Tax Event” (relating to loss of deduction for interest) unless it pays a premium, in addition to the Redemption Price, in cash equal to the product of (y) 100% of the outstanding principal amount thereof, and (z) the percentage specified below for the applicable date of redemption:
 
50

Redemption During the 12-Month
Percentage of Principal Amount
Period Beginning November 2
 
   
2005
 
5%
   
2006
 
4%
   
2007
 
3%
   
2008
 
2%
   
2009
 
1%
   
2010 and thereafter
 
0%
     

 
SECTION 14.02 Notice of Redemption; Selection of Surplus Notes.
 
In case the Company shall desire to exercise the right to redeem all, or, as the case may be, any part of the Surplus Notes in accordance with their terms, it shall fix a date for redemption and shall mail a notice of such redemption at least 30 and not more than 60 days prior to the date fixed for redemption to the Holders of Surplus Notes so to be redeemed as a whole or in part at their last addresses as the same appear on the Surplus Note Register, with a copy to the Trustee. Such mailing shall be by first class mail. The notice if mailed in the manner herein provided shall be conclusively presumed to have been duly given, whether or not the Holder receives such notice. In any case, failure to give such notice by mail or any defect in the notice to the Holder of any Surplus Note designated for redemption as a whole or in part shall not affect the validity of the proceedings for the redemption of any other Surplus Note.
 
Each such notice of redemption shall identify the Surplus Notes to be redeemed (including CUSIP number), specify the date fixed for redemption, the redemption price and premium, if any, at which Surplus Notes are to be redeemed, the place or places of payment, that payment will be made upon presentation and surrender of such Surplus Notes, that interest accrued to the date fixed for redemption will be paid as specified in said notice and that on and after said date interest thereon or on the portions thereof to be redeemed will cease to accrue. If less than all the Surplus Notes are to be redeemed the notice of redemption shall specify the numbers of the Surplus Notes to be redeemed. In case any Surplus Note is to be redeemed in part only, the notice of redemption shall state the portion of the principal amount thereof to be redeemed and shall state that on and after the date fixed for redemption, upon surrender of such Surplus Note, a new Surplus Note or Surplus Notes in principal amount equal to the unredeemed portion thereof will be issued.
 
51

Prior to 10:00 a.m. New York City time on the redemption date specified in the notice of redemption given as provided in this Section, the Company will deposit with the Trustee or with one or more paying agents an amount of money sufficient to redeem on the redemption date all the Surplus Notes so called for redemption at the appropriate redemption price and premium, if any, together with accrued interest to the date fixed for redemption.
 
If the Surplus Notes are to be redeemed, the Company will give the Trustee notice not less than 60 days prior to the redemption date as to the aggregate principal amount of Surplus Notes to be redeemed and, in the case of a partial redemption, the Trustee shall select, in such manner as in its sole discretion it shall deem appropriate and fair, the Surplus Notes or portions thereof (in integral multiples of $1,000) to be redeemed. The Company shall provide the Applicable Regulatory Authority with written notice at least thirty days prior to the intended date of the redemption.
 
SECTION 14.03 Payment of Surplus Notes Called for Redemption.
 
If notice of redemption has been given as provided in Section 14.02, the Surplus Notes or portions of Surplus Notes with respect to which such notice has been given shall become due and payable on the date and at the place or places stated in such notice at the applicable redemption price and premium, if any, together with interest accrued to the date fixed for redemption, and on and after said date (unless the Company shall default in the payment of such Surplus Notes at the redemption price and premium, if any, together with interest accrued to said date) interest on the Surplus Notes or portions of Surplus Notes so called for redemption shall cease to accrue. On presentation and surrender of such Surplus Notes at a place of payment specified in said notice, the said Surplus Notes or the specified portions thereof shall be paid and redeemed by the Company at the applicable redemption price and premium, if any, together with interest accrued thereon to the date fixed for redemption. If any Surplus Notes called for redemption shall not be so paid upon surrender thereof for redemption, the principal of and any premium on such Surplus Notes shall, until paid, bear interest from the date fixed for redemption at the rate prescribed therefor in the Surplus Notes.
 
Upon presentation of any Surplus Note redeemed in part only, the Company shall execute and the Trustee shall authenticate and deliver to the Holder thereof, at the expense of the Company, a new Surplus Note or Surplus Notes of authorized denominations, in principal amount equal to the unredeemed portion of the Surplus Note so presented.
 
ARTICLE XV
SUBORDINATION OF SECURITIES
 
SECTION 15.01 Agreement to Subordinate.
 
The Company covenants and agrees, and each Holder of Surplus Notes issued hereunder, by such Securityholder’s acceptance thereof, likewise covenants and agrees, that all Surplus Notes shall be issued subject to the provisions of this Article XV; and each Holder of a Surplus Note, whether upon original issue or upon transfer or assignment thereof, accepts and agrees to be bound by such provisions.
 
52

The payment by the Company of the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on all Surplus Notes issued hereunder shall, to the extent and in the manner hereinafter set forth, be subordinated and junior in right of payment to the prior payment in full of all Senior Indebtedness and Senior Claims of the Company, whether outstanding at the date of this Indenture or thereafter incurred.
 
No provision of this Article XV shall prevent the occurrence of any Default or Event of Default hereunder.
 
SECTION 15.02 Default on Senior Indebtedness.
 
No payment may be made of the principal of, premium, if any, or interest on the Surplus Notes, or in respect of any redemption, retirement, purchase or other acquisition of any of the Surplus Notes, at any time when (i) there is a default, after giving effect to any applicable grace period, in the payment of the principal of, premium, if any, interest on or otherwise in respect of any Senior Indebtedness, whether at maturity or at a date fixed for prepayment or by declaration or otherwise, or (ii) the maturity of any Senior Indebtedness of the Company has been accelerated because of a default and such acceleration has not been rescinded or canceled and such Senior Indebtedness has not been paid in full.
 
In the event that, notwithstanding the foregoing, any payment shall be received by the Trustee when such payment is prohibited by the preceding paragraph of this Section 15.02, such payment shall be held in trust by Trustee (to the extent such payment has not aready been released to the Holders of the Surplus Notes) and by the Holders of the Surplus Notes for the benefit of, and shall be paid over or delivered to, the holders of Senior Indebtedness or their respective representatives, or to the trustee or trustees under any indenture pursuant to which any of such Senior Indebtedness may have been issued, as their respective interests may appear, but only to the extent that the holders of the Senior Indebtedness (or their representative or representatives or a trustee) notify the Trustee in writing within 90 days of such payment of the amounts then due and owing on the Senior Indebtedness and only the amounts specified in such notice to the Holders of the Surplus Notes and the Trustee shall be paid by the Holders of the Surplus Notes to the holders of Senior Indebtedness.
 
SECTION 15.03 Liquidation; Dissolution; Rehabilitation, Conservation.
 
Subject to the provisions and requirements of the Insolvency Laws, upon any payment by the Company or distribution of assets of the Company of any kind or character, whether in cash, property or securities, to creditors upon any dissolution, liquidation, rehabilitation or conservation of the Company, whether voluntary or involuntary or in insolvency, receivership or other proceedings, all amounts due upon all Senior Indebtedness and Senior Claims of the Company shall first be paid in full, or payment thereof provided for in money in accordance with their terms, before any payment is made by the Company on account of the principal or interest on the Surplus Notes; and upon any such dissolution, liquidation, rehabilitation or conservation, any payment by the Company, or distribution of assets of the Company of any kind or character, whether in cash, property or securities, which the Securityholders or the Trustee would be entitled to receive from the Company, except under the provisions of this Article XV, shall subject to the provisions and requirements of the Insolvency Laws be paid by the Company or by any receiver, liquidating trustee, agent or other Person making such payment or distribution, or by the Securityholders or by the Trustee under the Indenture if received by them or it, directly to the holders of Senior Indebtedness of the Company (pro rata to such holders on the basis of the respective amounts of Senior Indebtedness held by such holders, as calculated by the Company) or their representative or representatives, or to the trustee or trustees under any indenture pursuant to which any instruments evidencing such Senior Indebtedness may have been issued, as their respective interests may appear, to the extent necessary to pay such Senior Indebtedness in full, in money or money’s worth, after giving effect to any concurrent payment or distribution to or for the holders of such Senior Indebtedness, before any payment or distribution is made to the Securityholders or to the Trustee.
 
53

In the event that, notwithstanding the foregoing, any payment or distribution of assets of the Company of any kind or character, whether in cash, property or securities, prohibited by the foregoing, shall be received by the Trustee or the Holders of the Surplus Notes before all Senior Indebtedness of the Company is paid in full, or provision is made for such payment in money in accordance with its terms, such payment or distribution shall be held in trust by the Trustee (to the extent such payment or distribution has not already been delivered to the Holders of Surplus Notes) and by the Holders of the Surplus Notes for the benefit of and shall be paid over or delivered to the holders of such Senior Indebtedness or their representative or representatives, or to the trustee or trustees under any indenture pursuant to which any instruments evidencing such Senior Indebtedness may have been issued, as their respective interests may appear, as directed and calculated by the Company, in each case, for application to the payment of all Senior Indebtedness of the Company remaining unpaid to the extent necessary to pay such Senior Indebtedness in full in money in accordance with its terms, after giving effect to any concurrent payment or distribution to or for the benefit of the holders of such Senior Indebtedness.
 
For purposes of this Article XV, the words “cash, property or securities” shall not be deemed to include (a) shares of stock of the Company as reorganized or readjusted, or (b) securities of the Company or any other entity provided for by a plan of reorganization or readjustment, the payment of which is subordinated at least to the extent provided in this Article XV with respect to the Surplus Notes to the payment of all Senior Indebtedness of the Company that may at the time be outstanding, provided, in each case, that (i) all Senior Indebtedness of the Company is assumed by the new entity, if any, resulting from any such reorganization or readjustment, and (ii) the rights of the holders of such Senior Indebtedness are not, without the consent of such holders, altered by such reorganization or readjustment. The Conversion of the Company, the consolidation of the Company with, or the merger of the Company into, another entity or the liquidation or dissolution of the Company following the conveyance or transfer of its property as an entirety, or substantially as an entirety, to another Person upon the terms and conditions provided for in Article X of this Indenture shall not be deemed a dissolution liquidation, rehabilitation or conservation for the purposes of this Section 15.03 if such other Person shall, as a part of such Conversion, consolidation, merger, conveyance or transfer, comply with the conditions stated in Article X of this Indenture. Nothing in Section 15.02 or in this Section 15.03 shall apply to claims of, or payments to, the Trustee under or pursuant to Section 6.06 of this Indenture.
 
54

SECTION 15.04 Subrogation of Securityholders.
 
Subject to the payment in full of all Senior Claims and Senior Indebtedness of the Company, the Securityholders shall be subrogated to the rights of the Persons to whom the Company is obligated under the Senior Claims (the “Senior Claim Holders”) and to the holders of the Senior Indebtedness to receive payments or distributions of cash, property or securities of the Company, as the case may be, applicable to such Senior Claims or Senior Indebtedness, as applicable, until all amounts owing on the Surplus Notes shall be paid in full; and, for the purposes of such subrogation, no payments or distributions to the Senior Claim Holders and the holders of such Senior Indebtedness of any cash, property or securities to which the Securityholders or the Trustee would be entitled except under the provisions of this Article XV, and no payment over pursuant to the provisions of this Article XV to or for the benefit of the Senior Claim Holders and the holders of such Senior Indebtedness by Securityholders or the Trustee, shall, as between the Company, its creditors (other than Senior Claim Holders and the holders of Senior Indebtedness of the Company), and the Holders of the Surplus Notes, be deemed to be a payment by the Company to or on account of such Senior Claims or Senior Indebtedness, as applicable. It is understood that the provisions of this Article XV are and are intended solely for the purposes of defining the relative rights of the Holders of the Surplus Notes, on the one hand, and the holders of such Senior Claims and Senior Indebtedness, on the other hand.
 
Nothing contained in this Article XV or elsewhere in this Indenture or in the Surplus Notes is intended to or shall impair, as between the Company, its creditors (other than the Senior Claim Holders and the holders of Senior Indebtedness of the Company), and the Holders of the Surplus Notes, the obligation of the Company, which is absolute and unconditional, to pay to the Holders of the Surplus Notes the principal of, premium, if any, and interest on, the Surplus Notes as and when the same shall become due and payable in accordance with their terms, or is intended to or shall affect the relative rights of the Holders of the Surplus Notes and creditors of the Company, as the case may be, other than the Senior Claim Holders and the holders of Senior Indebtedness of the Company, as the case may be, nor shall anything herein or therein prevent the Trustee or the Holder of any Surplus Note from exercising all remedies otherwise permitted by applicable law upon default under the Indenture, subject to the rights, if any, under this Article XV of the Senior Claim Holders and the holders of such Senior Indebtedness in respect of cash, property or securities of the Company, as the case may be, received upon the exercise of any such remedy.
 
Upon any payment or distribution of assets of the Company referred to in this Article XV, the Trustee, subject to the provisions of Article VI of this Indenture, and the Securityholders shall be entitled to conclusively rely upon any order or decree made by any Applicable Regulatory Authority or court of competent jurisdiction in which such dissolution, liquidation, rehabilitation or conservation proceedings are pending, or a certificate of the receiver, liquidation trustee, agent or other Person making such payment or distribution, delivered to the Trustee or to the Securityholders, for the purposes of ascertaining (i) the Persons entitled to participate in such payment or distribution, (ii) the Senior Claim Holders and the holders of Senior Indebtedness and other indebtedness of the Company, (iii) the amount of any payment or distribution made or payable to any such Persons, and (iv) all other facts pertinent thereto or to this Article XV in connection therewith.
 
55

Notwithstanding any other provision herein, the subrogation rights, obligations and agreements set forth in this Article XV shall at all times be subject to the provisions and requirements of the Insolvency Laws.
 
SECTION 15.05 Notice by the Company.
 
The Company shall give prompt written notice to a Responsible Officer of any fact known to the Company that would prohibit the making of any payment of monies to or by the Trustee in respect of the Surplus Notes pursuant to the provisions of this Article XV. Notwithstanding the provisions of this Article XV or any other provision of this Indenture, the Trustee shall not be charged with knowledge of the existence of any facts that would prohibit the making of any payment of monies to or by the Trustee in respect of the Surplus Notes pursuant to the provisions of this Article XV, unless and until a Responsible Officer shall have received written notice thereof from the Company or a holder or holders of Senior Indebtedness or from any trustee therefor or the Applicable Regulatory Authority; and before the receipt of any such written notice, the Trustee, subject to the provisions of Article VI of this Indenture, shall be entitled in all respects to assume that no such facts exist; provided, however, that if the Trustee shall not have received the notice provided for in this Section 15.06 at least two Business Days prior to the date upon which by the terms hereof any money may become payable for any purpose (including, without limitation, the payment of the principal of or interest on any Surplus Note), then, anything herein contained to the contrary notwithstanding, the Trustee shall have full power and authority to receive such money and to apply the same to the purposes for which they were received, and shall not be affected by any notice to the contrary that may be received by it within two Business Days prior to such date.
 
The Trustee shall be entitled to conclusively rely on the delivery to it of a written notice by a Person representing himself or herself to be a holder of Senior Indebtedness of the Company, as the case may be (or a trustee on behalf of such holder), to establish that such notice has been given by a holder of such Senior Indebtedness or a trustee on behalf of any such holder or holders. In the event that the Trustee determines in good faith that further evidence is required with respect to the right of any Person as a holder of such Senior Indebtedness to participate in any payment or distribution pursuant to this Article XV, the Trustee may request such Person to furnish evidence to the reasonable satisfaction of the Trustee as to the amount of such Senior Indebtedness held by such Person, the extent to which such Person is entitled to participate in such payment or distribution and any other facts pertinent to the rights of such Person under this Article XV, and, if such evidence is not furnished, the Trustee may defer any payment to such Person pending judicial determination as to the right of such Person to receive such payment. The Trustee shall be entitled to rely conclusively on a certificate from the Company as to the respective amounts of Senior Indebtedness held by the holders.
 
SECTION 15.06 Rights of the Trustee; Holders of Senior Indebtedness.
 
The Trustee in its individual capacity shall be entitled to all the rights set forth in this Article XV in respect of any Senior Indebtedness or Senior Claim at any time held by it, to the same extent as any other holder of Senior Indebtedness or Senior Claim Holder and nothing in this Indenture shall deprive the Trustee of any of its rights as such holder.
 
56

Nothing in this Article XV shall apply to claims of, or payments to, the Trustee under or pursuant to Section 6.06.
 
With respect to the Senior Claim Holders and the holders of Senior Indebtedness of the Company, the Trustee undertakes to perform or to observe only such of its covenants and obligations as are specifically set forth in this Article XV, and no implied covenants or obligations with respect to the Senior Claim Holders and the holders of such Senior Indebtedness shall be read into this Indenture against the Trustee. The Trustee shall not be deemed to owe any fiduciary duty to the Senior Claim Holders and the holders of such Senior Indebtedness and, subject to the provisions of Article VI of this Indenture, the Trustee shall not be liable to any Senior Claim Holder or any holder of such Senior Indebtedness if it shall pay over or deliver to Securityholders, the Company or any other Person, in the amounts directed and by the Company, money or assets to which any Senior Claim Holder or any holder of such Senior Indebtedness shall be entitled by virtue of this Article XV or otherwise.
 
SECTION 15.07 Subordination May Not Be Impaired.
 
No right of any present or future Senior Claim Holder or holder of any Senior Indebtedness of the Company to enforce subordination as herein provided shall at any time in any way be prejudiced or impaired by any act or failure to act on the part of the Company or by any act or failure to act, in good faith, by any such holder, or by any noncompliance by the Company with the terms, provisions and covenants of this Indenture, regardless of any knowledge thereof that any such holder may have or otherwise be charged with.
 
Without in any way limiting the generality of the foregoing paragraph, the Senior Claim Holders and the holders of Senior Indebtedness of the Company may, at any time and from time to time, without the consent of or notice to the Trustee or the Securityholders, without incurring responsibility to the Securityholders and without impairing or releasing the subordination provided in this Article XV or the obligations hereunder of the Holders of the Surplus Notes to the Senior Claim Holders and the holders of such Senior Indebtedness do any one or more of the following: (i) change the manner, place or terms of payment or extend the time of payment of, or renew or alter, such Senior Indebtedness, or otherwise amend or supplement in any manner such Senior Indebtedness or any instrument evidencing the same or any agreement under which such Senior Indebtedness is outstanding; (ii) sell, exchange, release or otherwise deal with any property pledged, mortgaged or otherwise securing such Senior Indebtedness; (iii) release any Person liable in any manner for the collection of such Senior Indebtedness; and (iv) exercise or refrain from exercising any rights against the Company or any other Person.
 
JPMorgan Chase Bank, National Association hereby accepts the trusts in this Indenture declared and provided, upon the terms and conditions hereinabove set forth.
 

57


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Indenture to be duly executed by their respective officers or agents thereunto duly authorized, all as of the day and year first above written.
 
 
PENNSYLVANIA MANUFACTURERS’ ASSOCIATION INSURANCE COMPANY
Attest:
 
   
/s/ Joseph W. La Barge  
By:
/s/ William E. Hitselberger   
Name: Joseph W. La Barge
 
Name: William E. Hitselberger 
Title: Assistant Secretary
 
Title: Senior Vice President and CFO
   
   
   
 
JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION
 
as Trustee
   
 
By:
/s/ Shelly A. Sterling   
   
Name: Shelly A. Sterling 
   
Title: Vice President
   


58



 
EXHIBIT A
 
[FORM OF NOTE TO BE ATTACHED]

59


 
EXHIBIT B

 
FORM OF QUARTERLY FINANCIAL REPORT
Surplus Note
 
TO:
JPMorgan Chase Bank, National Association
 
 
600 Travis Street
50th Floor
Houston, Texas 77002
Attention: Institutional Trust Services
 
     
PLEASE COMPLETE FOR THE SURPLUS NOTE ISSUER
All financial information provided herein should be provided in accordance with Statutory Accounting Principles. Please provide the following information for the most recent quarterly period ended.
 
Quarter: ྑ March 31 ྑ June 30 ྑ September 30 ྑ December 31, Year: 20____

Part I - To be completed by all surplus note issuers
Name of Surplus Note Issuer:
 
Date:
A.M. Best Insurer’s Financial Strength Rating:
 
Most Recently Reported NAIC RBC Ratio: %
Total Admitted Assets $
 
Total Policyholders’ Surplus $
Return on Policyholders’ Surplus for Trailing Twelve Month Period %
 
Ratio of Consolidated Debt and Preferred Stock to Total Policyholders’ Surplus %
Ratio of NAIC Class 1 & Class 2 Rated Investments to Total Fixed Income Investments %
 
Ratio of NAIC Class 1 & Class 2 Rated Investments to Total Investments %
 
Part II - To be completed by property & casualty companies only
Expense Ratio %
 
Loss and LAE Ratio %
Combined Ratio %
Ratio of Net Premiums Written (Trailing Twelve Month Period) to Policyholders’ Surplus %
 

60



CERTIFICATION
 
The undersigned certifies and states that the undersigned has duly executed the attached Quarterly Financial Report, dated _______________, 20_____, for and on behalf of ________________________, that the undersigned is the _______________ of such Company, and that the undersigned has authority to execute and deliver such instrument. The undersigned further says that the undersigned is familiar with such instrument and that the facts therein set forth are true to the best of the undersigned’s knowledge, information and belief.
 
 
Signed:
 
   
 
Name:
 
   
 
Date:
 
   


61



LEGEND - LIFE INSURERS
 
NAIC RBC Ratio:
(Total Adjusted Capital (as defined in the NAIC RBC Instructions for Life Insurers)/Authorized Control Level Risk-Based Capital)
   
Total Admitted Assets:
Total Admitted Assets as Determined in accordance with Statutory Accounting Principles
   
Total Capital and Surplus:
Common Capital Stock + Preferred Capital Stock + Aggregate Write-Ins for Special Surplus Funds + Aggregate Write-Ins for Other than Special Surplus Funds + Surplus Notes + Gross Paid-In and Contributed Surplus + Unassigned Funds (Surplus) Asset Valuation Reserve - Treasury Stock
   
Return on Policyholders’ Surplus
for the Trailing Twelve Month Period:
Net Income/Policyholders’ Surplus for the Trailing Twelve Month
Period
   
   
LEGEND - PROPERTY & CASUALTY INSURERS
 
NAIC RBC Ratio:
(Total Adjusted Capital (as defined in the NAIC RBC Instructions for Life Insurers)/Authorized Control Level Risk-Based Capital)
   
Total Admitted Assets:
Total Admitted Assets as Determined in accordance with Statutory Accounting Principles
   
Total Capital and Surplus:
Common Capital Stock + Preferred Capital Stock + Aggregate Write-Ins for Special Surplus Funds + Aggregate Write-Ins for Other than Special Surplus Funds + Surplus Notes + Gross Paid-In and Contributed Surplus + Unassigned Funds (Surplus) Asset Valuation Reserve - Treasury Stock
   
Return on Policyholders’ Surplus
for the Trailing Twelve Month Period:
Net Income/Policyholders’ Surplus for the Trailing Twelve Month
Period
   
Expense Ratio:
Other Underwriting Expenses Incurred/Net Premiums Earned
   
Loss and LAE Ratio:
(Losses Incurred + Loss Expenses Incurred)/Net Premiums Earned
   
Combined Ratio:
Expense Ratio + Loss and LAE Ratio
   
Net Premiums Written
(Trailing Twelve Month Period)
to Policyholders’ Surplus:
Net Premiums Written of the Trailing Twelve Month Period/
Policyholders’ Surplus
 

62

EX-10.1 3 ex10-1.htm EXHIBIT 10.1 Exhibit 10.1 Exhibit 10.1
THIRD AMENDMENT
TO THE
PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION 401(k) EXCESS PLAN
(As Amended and Restated Effective January 1, 2000)
 

 
WHEREAS, PMA Capital Corporation (the “Company”) maintains the PMA Capital Corporation 401(k) Excess Plan (the “Plan”) for the purpose of providing certain eligible employees of the Company and certain of its participating affiliates with benefits that would be provided under the PMA Capital Corporation 401(k) Plan (the “Qualified Plan”) but for the limitations imposed by Sections 401(k), 401(m), 415 and 401(a)(17) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”); and
 
WHEREAS, the Plan was most recently amended and restated effective January 1, 2000 and has since been modified by the First Amendment thereto effective January 1, 2003, and by the Second Amendment thereto effective January 1, 2004; and
 
WHEREAS, the Company will amend the Qualified Plan effective January 1, 2006 to implement thereunder a non-matching, age-based employer contribution; and
 
WHEREAS, the Company desires to provide to participants in the Plan the non-matching, age-based employer contributions that would be provided under the Qualified Plan but for the limitations imposed by Sections 401(a)(17) and 415 of the Code; and
 
WHEREAS, the Company also desires to rename the Plan at this time; and
 
WHEREAS, under Sections 8.1(a) and 10.4 of the Plan, the Company has reserved the right to amend the Plan with respect to all Participating Companies at any time, subject to certain inapplicable limitations;
 
NOW, THEREFORE, effective January 1, 2006, except as otherwise specifically provided herein, the Company hereby renames the Plan as the PMA Capital Corporation Retirement Savings Excess Plan, and also amends the Plan as follows:
 
1. Section 2.19 (definition of “Excess 401(k) Plan Account”) is amended to change the defined term to the “Excess Retirement Savings Plan Account.” Furthermore, all references within the Plan to the “Excess 401(k) Plan Account” are changed to the “Excess Retirement Savings Plan Account.”
 
2. Section 2.25 is amended to read as follows:
 
“2.25 Plan means the PMA Capital Corporation Retirement Savings Excess Plan, as set forth in this document and as amended from time to time.”
 
3. Section 2.28 is amended to read as follows:
 
“2.28 Qualified Plan means the PMA Capital Corporation Retirement Savings Plan, as amended from time to time.”
 


 
4. A new Section 2.30 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article II (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“2.30 Retirement Contributions means the non-matching, age-based employer contributions made by the Participating Company on behalf of a Participant to the Qualified Plan.”
 
5. A new Section 2.31 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article II (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“2.31 Retirement Credits means the amounts credited to a Participant’s Excess Retirement Savings Plan Account pursuant to Section 4.6.”
 
6. Section 3.2 is amended to read as follows:
 
“3.2 Procedure for and Effect of Admission. An Eligible Employee shall become a Participant upon the earlier of (a) the date on which he/she has completed an Excess Salary Reduction Agreement and such other forms and provided such data as are reasonably required by the Administrator, or (b) the date on which a Retirement Credit is first credited to his Excess Retirement Savings Plan Account. By becoming a Participant, an Eligible Employee shall for all purposes be deemed conclusively to have assented to the provisions of this Plan and all amendments hereto.”
 
7. Section 4.1 is amended to read as follows:
 
“4.1 Establishment of Plan Accounts. The Plan Sponsor shall establish and maintain on its books and records, solely as a bookkeeping entry, an Excess Retirement Savings Plan Account for each Participant. Each Excess Retirement Savings Plan Account will be used to record:
 
(a) The Employee Pre-Tax Credits, Employer Matching Credits, and Retirement Credits credited under this Plan on behalf of the Participant pursuant to Sections 4.3, 4.5 and 4.6.
 
(b) The credits or debits for investment earnings or losses under Section 4.7; and
 
(c) The payments of benefits to the Participant or the Participant’s Beneficiary under Article VI.”
 
8. A new Section 4.6 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article IV (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“4.6 Retirement Credits. For each calendar quarter for which a Participant is entitled to a Retirement Contribution under the Qualified Plan, the Plan Sponsor shall credit each Participant’s Excess Retirement Savings Plan Account with Retirement Credits in an amount equal to:
 

2



 
(a) The amount of Retirement Contributions that would have been made for the calendar quarter on behalf of the Participant, but for the limitations of Sections 401(a)(17) and 415 of the Code; minus
 
(b) The amount of Retirement Contributions actually made to the Qualified Plan on behalf of the Participant for the calendar quarter.”
 
9. Section 4.7 (renumbered from 4.6) is amended to read as follows:
 
“4.7 Allocation among Investment Options. A Participant may direct that the Employee Pre-Tax Credits, Employer Matching Credits, and Retirement Credits credited to his or her Excess Retirement Savings Plan Account be valued, in accordance with Section 4.9, as if the balance credited to the Excess Retirement Savings Plan Account were invested in one or more Vanguard Funds or other investments selected by the Participant. The Participant may select any of the investment options set forth in Appendix A in multiples of 5% (or such smaller percentage as the Administrator may determine). The designation of one or more investment options, whether a Vanguard Fund or otherwise, by a Participant under this Section 4.7 shall be used solely to measure the amounts of investment earnings or losses that will be credited or debited to the Participant’s Excess Retirement Savings Plan Account on the Plan Sponsor’s books and records, and the Plan Sponsor shall not be required under the Plan to establish any account in the Vanguard Funds or to purchase any Vanguard Fund shares or other investment on the Participant’s behalf. The designation by a Participant of any investment option under this Section 4.7 shall be made in accordance with the rules and procedures prescribed by the Administrator.”
 
10. Section 4.8 (renumbered from 4.7) is amended to read as follows:
 
“4.8 Administration of Investments. The investment gain or loss with respect to Employee Pre-Tax Credits, Employer Matching Credits, and Retirement Credits credited to the Participant’s Excess Retirement Savings Plan Account on behalf of such Participant shall continue to be determined in the manner selected by the Participant pursuant to Section 4.7 until a new designation is filed with the Administrator or its appointee. If any Participant fails to file a designation, he or she shall be deemed to have elected to continue to follow the investment designation, if any, in effect for the immediately preceding Plan Year. A designation filed by a Participant changing his or her investment option selection shall apply to either future contributions, amounts already accumulated in his or her Excess Retirement Savings Plan Account, or both. A Participant may change his or her investment selection on any Valuation Date and such change shall be effected as soon as administratively practicable.”
 

3


 
 
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION has caused these presents to be duly executed, under seal, this 24th day of  October, 2005.
 

 

 
Attest:
PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION
[SEAL]
 

/s/ Robert L. Pratter
/s/ William E. Hitselberger
Robert L. Pratter, Secretary
William E. Hitselberger, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
 
 

4

EX-10.2 4 ex10-2.htm EXHIBIT 10.2 Exhibit 10.2 Exhibit 10.2
SECOND AMENDMENT
TO THE
PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION 401(k) PLAN
(As Amended and Restated Effective January 1, 1999)
 

 
WHEREAS, PMA Capital Corporation (the “Company”) maintains the PMA Capital Corporation 401(k) Plan (the “Plan”) for the benefit of certain of its employees, and the eligible employees of certain participating affiliates; and
 
WHEREAS, the Plan was most recently amended and restated effective January 1, 1999 and has since been modified by the First Amendment thereto effective January 1, 2003; and
 
WHEREAS, the Company wishes to amend the Plan to implement a non-matching, age-based employer contribution, and to rename the Plan; and
 
WHEREAS, under Sections 12.2 and 15.4 of the Plan, the Company has reserved the right to amend the Plan with respect to all Participating Companies at any time, subject to certain inapplicable limitations;
 
NOW, THEREFORE, effective January 1, 2006, except as otherwise specifically provided herein, the Company hereby amends the Plan as follows:
 
1. Section 2.6 is amended to read as follows:
 
“2.6 Annual Addition shall mean the sum of the following amounts credited to a Participant’s account for a Limitation Year:
 
(a) Employer contributions (e.g., Pre-Tax, Employer Matching, and Retirement Contributions);
 
(b) Forfeitures (if any) (excluding amounts necessary to reinstate previously forfeited Account balances in accordance with Section 7.4(g));
 
(c) Employee Contributions (i.e., After-Tax Contributions), if any;
 
(d) Any amount allocated to the Participant’s individual medical account (within the meaning of Section 415(l) of the Code) under any Defined Benefit Plan maintained by the Employer;
 
(e) Any amount attributable to post-retirement medical benefits which is allocated pursuant to Section 419A(d) of the Code to the separate account of a Key Employee under a welfare benefit fund (within the meaning of Section 419(e) of the Code) maintained by the Employer;
 
(f) Allocations under a simplified employee pension; and
 



(g) Any Excess Amount applied under Section 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3 (if applicable), in the Limitation Year to reduce Employer or Affiliated Employer contributions for such Limitation Year.”
 
2. A new Section 2.48 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article II (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“2.48 Grandfathered Participant means a Participant who, as of December 31, 2005, was an Eligible Employee who had both attained age 50 and was credited with 5 or more Years of Service.”
 
3. Section 2.64 (renumbered from 2.63) is amended to read as follows:
 
“2.64 Participant’s Account or Account shall mean, as to any Participant, the separate account maintained in order to reflect his or her interest in the Plan. Each Participant’s Account shall be comprised of one or more separate subaccounts, as follows:
 
(a) After-Tax Contribution Account shall mean the subaccount maintained to record the After-Tax Contributions allocated to a Participant’s Account and the adjustments relating thereto.
 
(b) Employer Account shall mean the subaccount maintained to record any required Employer contributions made to the Plan on behalf of Participants who are not Key Employees under Section XIV with respect to any Plan Year in which the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan.
 
(c) Employer Matching Contribution Account (After-Tax Contributions) shall mean the subaccount maintained to record the Employer Matching Contributions allocated to a Participant’s Account with respect to the After-Tax Contributions made by such Participant and the adjustments relating thereto.
 
(d) Employer Matching Contribution Account (Pre-Tax Contributions) shall mean the subaccount maintained to record the Employer Matching Contributions allocated to a Participant’s Account with respect to the Pre-Tax Contributions made on behalf of such Participant and the adjustments relating thereto.
 
(e) Loan Account shall mean the subaccount maintained to record a Participant’s outstanding loan balance.
 
(f) Pre-Tax Contribution Account shall mean the subaccount maintained to record the Pre-Tax Contributions made on behalf of a Participant and the adjustments relating thereto.
 
(g) Qualified Matching Contribution Account shall mean the subaccount maintained to record the Qualified Matching Contributions made on behalf of a Participant and the adjustments relating thereto.
 

2


(h) Qualified Non-Elective Contribution Account shall mean the subaccount maintained to record the Qualified Non-Elective Contributions made on behalf of a Participant and the adjustments relating thereto.
 
(i) Retirement Contribution Account shall mean the subaccount maintained to record the Retirement Contributions allocated to the Participant’s Account under Section 4.6 and the adjustments relating thereto.
 
(j) Rollover Account shall mean the subaccount maintained to record the Rollover Contributions made by a Participant and the adjustments relating thereto.
 
(k) Transfer Account shall mean the subaccount maintained to record the amounts transferred to this Plan in a plan-to-plan transfer from any other tax-qualified retirement plan and the adjustments relating thereto.”
 
4. Section 2.70 (renumbered from 2.69) is amended to read as follows:
 
“2.70 Plan shall mean The PMA Capital Corporation Retirement Savings Plan, as set forth herein and as it may be amended hereafter from time to time. Prior to December 7, 1998, the Plan was known as The PMA 401(k) Plan. From December 7, 1998 through December 31, 2005, the Plan was known as The PMA Capital Corporation 401(k) Plan. The Plan is intended to qualify as a Section 401(k) profit sharing plan for all purposes under the Code.”
 
5. A new Section 2.84 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article II (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“2.84 Retirement Contributions shall mean the amounts contributed under the Plan by the Employer on behalf of Participants in accordance with Section 4.6.”
 
6. Section 2.97 (renumbered from 2.95) is amended to read as follows:
 
“2.97 Vested Interest shall mean the sum of the vested balances in a Participant’s Pre-Tax Contribution Account, Retirement Contribution Account, Employer Account, if any, Rollover Account, if any, Transfer Account, if any, Loan Account, if any, Employer Matching Contribution Account (Pre-Tax Contributions), Employer Matching Contribution Account (After-Tax Contributions), if any, and After-Tax Contribution Account, if any.”
 
7. A new Section 4.6 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article IV (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 

3



 
“4.6 Retirement Contributions. With respect to each calendar quarter beginning on or after January 1, 2006, the Employer shall make a Retirement Contribution on behalf of each Participant described in Section (a) hereof, in an amount described in Section (b) hereof.
 
(a) Eligibility. A Participant shall have a Retirement Contribution made on his or her behalf for any calendar quarter if he or she:
 
(i) had been credited with at least one Year of Service as of the day before the beginning of the calendar quarter;
 
(ii) was a Participant at any time during such calendar quarter;
 
(iii) had Compensation for such calendar quarter; and
 
(iv) was an Eligible Employee of the Employer as of the last day of the calendar quarter; provided however, that this requirement shall be deemed to be satisfied if the Participant had a Separation from Service during the calendar quarter by reason of his or her death, Total Disability, or after having satisfied the requirements for a normal, early or late retirement under the terms of the PMA Capital Corporation Pension Plan.
 
(b) Amount. For any Participant described in Subsection (a) hereof, the Retirement Contribution with respect to any calendar quarter shall equal:
 
(i) for any Participant who is not a Grandfathered Participant, a percentage of his or her Compensation for the calendar quarter to be determined under the following table, based on the Participant’s attained age as of the last day of the Plan Year in which the calendar quarter occurs:

Participant’s Age
Percentage of Compensation
Less than 30
2%
At least 30 but less than 45
3%
At least 45 but less than 55
4%
55 or older
5%
 
(ii) for any Grandfathered Participant, a percentage of his or her Compensation for the calendar quarter to be determined under the following table, based on the Participant’s attained age as of the last day of the Plan Year in which the calendar quarter occurs:
 

4


 
Participant’s Age
Percentage of Compensation
At least 50 but less than 55
6%
At least 55 but less than 60
8%
60 or older
10%”
 
8. Section 4.10(a) (renumbered from 4.9(a)) is amended to read as follows:
 
“(a) Investment Elections. Each Participant shall be given the option to direct the investment of the balance in his or her Account among alternative Investment Media established as part of the overall Trust Fund. Such Investment Media may be under the full control and management of the Trustee, an insurance company or an Investment Manager. A Participant’s right to direct the investment of any contribution shall apply only to the selection of the desired Investment Medium or Media and shall be subject to such restrictions and limitations as may be imposed by each of the Investment Media or by the Administrator. The following rules shall apply to the administration of such Investment Media:
 
(i) At the time an Employee becomes eligible for the Plan, he or she shall complete an Appropriate Form stating the percentage of his or her contributions to be invested in the available Investment Media. Allocations to an Investment Medium shall be made in such minimum percentage, as the Administrator shall determine from time to time.
 
(ii) A Participant may change the investment of his or her future contributions on each Valuation Date.
 
(iii) A Participant may elect to transfer balances from one or more Investment Media to another on each Valuation Date.
 
(iv) All investment elections and changes shall be made in such manner, at such times and in such form as the Administrator may from time to time prescribe through uniform and nondiscriminatory rules.
 
(v) The amounts contributed by all Participants to each Investment Medium shall be commingled for investment purposes.
 
(vi) The Trustee may hold assets of the Trust Fund and make contributions therefrom in the form of cash without liability for interest, if for administrative purposes it becomes necessary or practical to do so.
 
(vii) Notwithstanding any other provision of this Section 4.10(a) to the contrary, a Participant may direct the investment of his or her Account (exclusive of his or her Retirement Contribution Account) into and out of the PMA Capital Corporation Class A Common Stock Fund subject to the following guidelines:
 

5



 
(1) A Participant may elect, pursuant to procedures established by the Administrator, to have up to twenty-five (25) percent or such other percentage, up to one hundred (100) percent, as determined by the Administrator on a uniform and non-discriminatory basis of his or her Pre-Tax Contributions, After-Tax Contributions and Employer Matching Contributions invested in the PMA Capital Corporation Class A Common Stock Fund;
 
(2) Once each ninety (90) days or at such other times as determined by the Administrator on a uniform and non-discriminatory basis, a Participant may elect to transfer, pursuant to procedures established by the Administrator, up to twenty-five (25) percent or such other percentage, up to one hundred (100) percent, as determined by the Administrator on a uniform and non-discriminatory basis of the balance in his or her Account (excluding the outstanding balance of any Plan loans to such Participant and excluding his or her Retirement Contribution Account) from any other Investment Media in which his or her Account is invested to the PMA Capital Corporation Class A Common Stock Fund;
 
(3) Once each ninety (90) days or at such other times as determined by the Administrator on a uniform and non-discriminatory basis, a Participant may elect to transfer, pursuant to procedures established by the Administrator, up to twenty-five (25) percent or such other percentage, up to one hundred (100) percent, as determined by the Administrator on a uniform and non-discriminatory basis of the portion of his or her Account invested in the PMA Capital Corporation Class A Common Stock Fund to one or more of the other Investment Media.”
 
9. A new Section 4.10(c) is added to read as follows:
 
“(c) Default Elections. If a Participant fails to make an investment election in accordance with Section 4.10(a) that is expressly applicable to his or her Retirement Contribution Account, his or her Retirement Contribution Account shall be invested as follows:
 
(i) If the Participant has made a currently effective investment election with respect to all subaccounts other than his or her Retirement Contribution Account, then his or her Retirement Contribution Account shall be invested among the selected Investment Media (other than the PMA Capital Corporation Class A Common Stock Fund) in the same proportions as the percentage that has been directed to each selected Investment Medium (other than the PMA Capital Corporation Class A Common Stock Fund) bears to the sum of the percentages that have been directed to all such other Investment Media. For example, if a Participant has elected to invest his Account as follows - 25% to Fund A, 25% to Fund B, 25% to Fund C, and 25% to the PMA Capital Corporation Class A Common Stock Fund - but he has not made a currently effective investment election with respect to his Retirement Contribution Account, his Retirement Contribution Account shall be invested as follows - 33⅓% to Fund A, 33⅓% to Fund B and 33⅓% to Fund C.
 

6



 
(ii) If the Participant has no currently effective investment election under the Plan at the time a Retirement Contribution is made, his or her Retirement Contribution Account shall be invested in such Investment Medium or Media as is determined by the Administrator, in its sole discretion.”
 
10. Section 4.12 (renumbered from 4.11) is amended to read as follows:
 
“4.12 Adjustments to Pre-Tax, After-Tax, Employer Matching Contribution and Retirement Contribution Rates. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Article IV, to the extent necessary to comply with applicable law, the maximum Pre-Tax and After-Tax Contribution percentage and the amount of Employer Matching Contributions or Retirement Contributions may be increased or decreased in the absolute discretion of the Administrator, provided that no such adjustment may be made without at least thirty (30) days prior written notice to all Participants.”
 
11. Section 4.13 (renumbered from 4.12) is amended to read as follows:
 
“4.13 No Profits Limitation. Pre-Tax Contributions, Employer Matching Contributions and Retirement Contributions hereunder shall be made without regard to whether an Employer has current or accumulated net earnings.”
 
12. Section 6.1(a) is amended to read as follows:
 
“6.1 Participants’ Accounts. At the direction of the Administrator, there shall be established and maintained for each Participant the following subaccounts:
 
(a) An After-Tax Contribution Account to which shall be credited all After-Tax Contributions paid to the Trust Fund at the Participant’s election pursuant to Section 4.2;
 
(b) An Employer Account to which shall be credited any Employer contributions required to be made under Article XIV of the Plan on behalf of Participants who are not Key Employees for any Plan Year in which the Plan is a Top-Heavy Plan;
 
7

(c) An Employer Matching Contribution Account (After-Tax Contributions) to which shall be credited the Employer Matching Contributions made in respect of his or her After-Tax Contributions pursuant to Section 4.3;
 
(d) An Employer Matching Contribution Account (Pre-Tax Contributions) to which shall be credited the Employer Matching Contributions made in respect of his or her Pre-Tax Contributions pursuant to Section 4.3;
 
(e) A Loan Account to which shall be credited the outstanding balance of a Participant’s loan;
 
(f) A Pre-Tax Contribution Account to which shall be credited all Pre-Tax Contributions paid to the Trust Fund at his or her election;
 
(g) A Qualified Matching Contribution Account to which shall be credited the Qualified Matching Contributions made on behalf of the Participant pursuant to Section 4.5;
 
(h) A Qualified Non-Elective Contribution Account to which shall be credited the Qualified Non-Elective Contributions made on behalf of the Participant pursuant to Section 4.5;
 
(i) A Retirement Contribution Account to which shall be credited the Retirement Contributions made on behalf of the Participant pursuant to Section 4.6.
 
(j) A Rollover Account to which shall be credited the Rollover Contributions made by, or on behalf of, a Participant or other Eligible Employee pursuant to Section 4.7; and
 
(k) A Transfer Account to which shall be credited any amounts transferred to this Plan from another tax-qualified plan pursuant to Section 4.8.”
 
13. Section 7.2(b) is amended to read as follows:
 
“(b) Vesting in Other Employer Contributions and Retirement Contributions. 
 
(i) Employer Matching Contributions. A Participant’s interest in his or her Employer Matching Contribution Account (After-Tax Contributions) and in his or her Employer Matching Contribution Account (Pre-Tax Contributions) shall be vested and nonforfeitable in accordance with the following schedule:
 
8

Number of Years of Service
Account’s Vested Percentage
Less than 1
0%
1 but less than 2
10%
2 but less than 3
40%
3 but less than 4
60%
4 but less than 5
80%
5 or more
100%

(ii) Retirement Contributions. A Participant’s interest in his or her Retirement Contribution Account shall be vested and nonforfeitable in accordance with the following schedule:
 
Number of Years of Service
Account’s Vested Percentage
Less than 5
0%
5 or more
100%

Upon termination of the Participant’s employment with the Employer and all Affiliated Employers for any reason at any time, the vested portion of his or her Employer Matching Contribution Account (After-Tax Contributions), his or her Employer Matching Contribution Account (Pre-Tax Contributions), and his or her Retirement Contribution Account shall be distributable to him or her in the manner and at the time set forth in this Article VII. If a Participant receives a cash-out pursuant to Section 7.4(f), the nonvested portion of such Participant’s Account, if any, shall be forfeited in accordance with Section 7.4(f) at the time of distribution. If a Participant has a Separation from Service and does not receive a cash-out pursuant to Section 7.4(f) or otherwise receive a distribution, then the non-vested portion of such Participant’s Account will be forfeited after such Participant incurs five (5) consecutive one year Breaks in Service (i.e., a Period of Severance of five (5) years). All forfeitures shall be utilized to reduce Employer Matching Contributions and/or Retirement Contributions for the then current or succeeding Plan Years.
 
Notwithstanding the foregoing, a Participant’s interest in his or her Account shall be 100% vested and nonforfeitable upon such Participant’s death or Total Disability or attaining of Normal Retirement Age and shall be distributable in the manner and at the time set forth in this Article VII.
 
If a Rehired Employee becomes a Participant after having incurred five (5) consecutive one year Breaks in Service (i.e., a Period of Severance of five (5) years), such Rehired Employee’s service earned after such five consecutive one year Breaks in Service (i.e., a Period of Severance of five (5) years) will be disregarded for the purpose of determining the vested percentage in his/her Account which accrued before such five consecutive one year Breaks in Service (i.e., a Period of Severance of five (5) years). However, as to such a Rehired Employee, both pre-Break and post-Break service will count for purposes of determining the vested percentage in his or her Account that accrued after such Break.”
 
9

14. A new Section 7.4(f)(v) is added, effective for distributions made on and after March 28, 2005 (including distributions to Participants who terminate employment prior to such date), to read as follows:
 
“(v) In the event of a mandatory distribution greater than $1,000 in accordance with the provisions of Section 7.4(f)(i), if the Participant does not elect to have such distribution paid directly to an eligible retirement plan specified by the Participant in a direct rollover in accordance with Section 7.13 or to receive the distribution directly, then the Administrator will pay the distribution in a direct rollover to an individual retirement account designated by the Administrator.”
 
15. Section 8.1(a) is amended to read as follows:
 
“(a) General. Subject to the provisions of this Section 8.1 and once the Participant’s After-Tax Contribution Account has been withdrawn in full pursuant to Section 8.2(a), a Participant, other than a Participant who is no longer an Employee, may make a “Hardship” (as defined below) withdrawal (with the approval of the Administrator) from the Participant’s Account (exclusive of his or her Retirement Contribution Account), in order to satisfy an immediate and heavy financial need specified in Section 8.1(d), in the following order of priority: (i) Rollover Account balance, (ii) Transfer Account balance, (iii) Pre-Tax Contribution Account balance, (iv) Employer Matching Contribution Account (After-Tax Contributions) balance, to the extent vested, and (v) Employer Matching Contribution Account (Pre-Tax Contributions) balance, to the extent vested. As required by Section 8.1(d), no Hardship withdrawal pursuant to this Section 8.1 shall be permitted until the Participant elects to withdraw, or has withdrawn, the entire balance in his or her After-Tax Contribution Account in accordance with Section 8.2(a). For purposes of this Section 8.1, “Hardship” is defined as an immediate and heavy financial need, as specified in Section 8.1(d), of the Participant where such Participant lacks other available resources.”
 
16. Section 8.2(b) is amended to read as follows:
 
“(b) Upon and After Attaining Age 59½. Upon attaining age 59½, a Participant, by filing an Appropriate Form, may elect to withdraw up to the total value of his or her Account (exclusive of his or her Retirement Contribution Account), determined as of the Valuation Date coinciding with, or if the Valuation Date does not coincide with the benefit commencement date, the Valuation Date immediately preceding the benefit commencement date. Withdrawals pursuant to this Section 8.2(b) may be elected no more frequently than once per Plan Year.”
 
10

17. Section 9.3 is amended to read as follows:
 
“9.3 Amount of Loan. The amount an eligible Participant may borrow may not be:
 
(a) Less than $200, and
 
(b) More than the amount which (when added to the outstanding balance of any other loan made from the Plan or any other quantified retirement plan maintained by the Employer or an Affiliated Employer) is the lesser of:
 
(i) $50,000, reduced by the excess of
 
(1) The highest outstanding balance of loans from the Plan during the 12 months ending on the day before the date a new loan is made over
 
(2) The outstanding loan balance on the date of the new loan, or
 
(ii) Fifty percent (50%) of the value of the eligible Participant’s Vested Interest (exclusive of any Vested Interest in his or her Retirement Contribution Account).”
 
18. Section 9.4(b) is amended to read as follows:
 
“(b) Allocation between Accounts. All loans shall first be made from the Participant’s Rollover Account, then from the Transfer Account, then from the Employer Matching Contribution Account (Pre-Tax Contributions), to the extent vested, then from the Employer Matching Contribution Account (After-Tax Contributions), to the extent vested, then from the Pre-Tax Contribution Account and finally from the After-Tax Contribution Account. No loans shall be made from a Participant’s Retirement Contribution Account. Repayments of principal and interest shall be invested in accordance with the investment election then in effect with respect to the Participant’s Pre-Tax Contributions. If no Pre-Tax Contributions are being made to the Plan by the Participant or if there is no valid investment election in effect, the principal and interest repayments shall be invested in such Investment Medium or Media as is determined by the Administrator, in its sole discretion.”
 
19. Section 11.3 is amended to read as follows:
 
“11.3 Continuing Conditions with Respect to Contributions. Any obligation to contribute Pre-Tax Contributions and/or to make Employer Matching Contributions or Retirement Contributions to the Trust Fund is hereby conditioned upon the continued qualification of the Plan under Section 401(a) of the Code and the exempt status of the Trust Fund under Section 501(a) of the Code and upon the deductibility of such contributions under Section 404(a) of the Code. That portion of any Pre-Tax Contributions, Employer Matching Contributions, or Retirement Contributions which is contributed or made by reason of a good faith mistake of fact, or by reason of a good faith mistake in determining the deductibility of such contribution, shall be returned to the Employer as promptly as practicable, but not later than one year after the contribution was made or the deduction was disallowed (as the case may be). The amount returned pursuant to the preceding sentence shall he an amount equal to the excess of the amount actually contributed over the amount that would have been contributed if the mistake had not been made; provided, however, that gains attributable to the returnable portion shall be retained in the Trust Fund; and provided, further, that the returnable portion shall be reduced (a) by any losses attributable thereto and (b) to avoid a reduction in the balance of any Participant’s Account below the balance that would have resulted if the mistake had not been made.”
 

11

 
20. Section 11.4 is amended to read as follows:
 
“11.4 Status as Eligible Individual Account Plan. Pursuant to Section 407 of ERISA, up to one hundred (100) percent of the Plan’s assets (exclusive of those assets which are attributable to Retirement Contributions) may be invested in Qualifying Employer Securities that are PMA Capital Corporation Class A Common Stock.”
 
21. Section 12.1 is amended to read as follows:
 
“12.1 Employer’s Obligations Limited. The Plan is voluntary on the part of each Employer, and except as required by applicable law, each Employer shall have no responsibility to satisfy any liabilities under the Plan. Furthermore, the Employer and Plan Sponsor do not guarantee to continue the Plan, and the Plan Sponsor at any time may, by appropriate amendment of the Plan, suspend or discontinue Employer Matching Contributions and/or Retirement Contributions, with or without cause. Complete discontinuance of all Pre-Tax Contributions, Employer Matching Contributions and Retirement Contributions shall be deemed a termination of the Plan. If Employer Matching Contributions are suspended, each Eligible Employee shall be notified of the suspension and each Eligible Employee may thereupon elect to suspend his or her Pre-Tax Contributions for the period during which Employer Matching Contributions are suspended.”
 
22. Section 12.3 is amended to read as follows:
 
“12.3 Effect of Termination. If the Plan is completely or partially terminated, or if there is a complete discontinuance of Pre-Tax, Employer Matching, and Retirement Contributions, then the interests of all Participants affected by such termination or discontinuance in their Accounts shall be 100% vested and nonforfeitable. The balances credited to the Accounts of the affected Participants may be distributed to them in the manner set forth in Article VII hereof, as if a distribution event described in Section 7.1 hereof had occurred with respect to each affected Participant on the date of the termination; or the Administrator (in its sole discretion) may direct that the following sentence shall apply to their Accounts. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the balances credited to the Pre-Tax Contribution Accounts of the affected Participants may be distributed prior to the occurrence of a distribution event described in Section 7.1 only to the extent permitted by the Code.”
 

12

 
 
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION has caused these presents to be duly executed, under seal, this 24th day of  October, 2005.
 
Attest:
PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION
[SEAL]
 

/s/ Robert L. Pratter
/s/ William E. Hitselberger
Robert L. Pratter, Secretary
William E. Hitselberger, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer

 
 
13

EX-10.3 5 ex10-3.htm EXHIBIT 10.3 Exhibit 10.3                                                                                                        0;                     Exhibit 10.3
SECOND AMENDMENT
 
TO THE
 
PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT PENSION PLAN
 
(as amended and restated effective january 1, 2000)
 

 
WHEREAS, some executives hired in mid-career by PMA Capital Corporation (the “Company”) are not able to be credited under the PMA Capital Corporation Pension Plan (the “Pension Plan”) with the maximum number of years of benefit service allowable under the Pension Plan (“Short Service Reduction”); and
 
WHEREAS, the Company maintains the PMA Capital Corporation Executive Management Pension Plan (the “Plan”) to provide the Short Service Reduction benefits to a select group of management and highly compensated employees; and
 
WHEREAS, the Plan was most recently amended and restated effective January 1, 2000 and has since been modified by the First Amendment thereto effective January 1, 2003; and
 
WHEREAS, the Company now desires to close participation in the Plan to new eligible executives and to modify the method by which Plan benefits are calculated by (1) freezing the accrual of benefits under the current Plan formula effective December 31, 2005 (but not freezing future reductions to accrued benefits as may result from future service with the Company), and (2) supplementing such frozen accruals with benefits derived from future “Contribution Credits” to be made to the Plan for plan years beginning on or after January 1, 2006; and
 
WHEREAS, under Sections 7.2(a) and 8.4 of the Plan, the Company has reserved the right to amend the Plan with respect to all Participating Companies at any time, subject to certain inapplicable limitations;
 
NOW, THEREFORE, effective January 1, 2006, except as otherwise specifically provided herein, the Company hereby amends the Plan as follows:
 
1.  A new Section 1.4 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article I (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“1.4 Beneficiary. The person or persons, or legal entity or entities, designated by a Participant or otherwise eligible under Section 6.3 to receive benefits (with respect to the Participant’s Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit) after the Participant’s death.”
 
2.  A new Section 1.9 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article I (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“1.9 Compensation. With respect to any Participant, his or her “Compensation” (as such term is defined in Article II of the Retirement Savings Plan) equal to his or her annual rate of pay as in effect on the date that he or she first performed an Hour of Service.”
 
 
 
 

 
 
3.  A new Section 1.10 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article I (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“1.10 Contribution Account. With respect to any Participant, the recordkeeping entry maintained on the books and records of the Plan Sponsor to reflect Contribution Credits made on the Participant’s behalf (reduced by the value of any Expired Contribution Subaccounts), and adjustments thereto, pursuant to Article III.”
 
4.  A new Section 1.11 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article I (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“1.11 Contribution Credits. Those amounts which are credited to a Participant’s Contribution Account pursuant to Section 3.1.”
 
5.  A new Section 1.12 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article I (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“1.12 Contribution Subaccount. A subaccount maintained within a Participant’s Contribution Account, with respect to Contribution Credits for a given Plan Year, and adjustments thereto.”
 
6.  A new Section 1.13 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article I (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“1.13 Determination Date. March 31, June 30, September 30 and December 31 of each Plan Year.”
 
7.  A new Section 1.15 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article I (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“1.15 Expired Contribution Subaccount. Solely with respect to a Participant whose Past Service Credit under the Plan has been reduced to zero in accordance with Section 2.1, the oldest Contribution Subaccount of any Participant shall become an Expired Contribution Subaccount on the date as of which two times the Participant’s Years of Service after December 31, 2005 under the Retirement Savings Plan exceeds twenty-five (25). An example of the conversion of Contribution Subaccounts to Expired Contribution Subaccounts is set forth in Section 2.1(c). Upon his or her completion of each subsequent Year of Service under the Retirement Savings Plan, the Participant’s next oldest Contribution Subaccount shall become an additional Expired Contribution Subaccount.”
 
 
 
2

 
 
8.  A new Section 1.17 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article I (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“1.17 Grandfathered Participant. A Participant who, as of December 31, 2005, was an Eligible Executive who had both attained age 50 and was credited with 5 or more actual Years of Vesting Service under the Pension Plan (excluding any additional years of service that are recognized under this Plan).
 
9.  Section 1.18 (renumbered from 1.10) is amended to read as follows:
 
“1.18 Participant. An Eligible Executive or Former Eligible Executive who accrues, or has accrued, benefits under this Plan on and after January 1, 1999. No Eligible Executive shall become a Participant after December 31, 2005.”
 
10.  Section 1.21 (renumbered from 1.13) is amended to read as follows:
 
“1.21 Past Service Retirement Benefit. That portion of a Participant’s Retirement Benefit that is attributable to his past service retirement benefit under this Plan on and after January 1, 1999 (and frozen with respect to future accruals effective December 31, 2005), and under the PMA SERP before January 1, 1999, both as determined in accordance with Section 2.2 hereof.”
 
11.  A new Section 1.27 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article I (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“1.27 Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit. That portion of a Participant’s Retirement Benefit that is attributable to Contribution Credits credited on his or her behalf pursuant to Section 3.1.”
 
12.  A new Section 1.29 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article I (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“1.29 Retirement Benefit. For any Participant, the sum of his or her Past Service Retirement Benefit and Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit.”
 
13.  A new Section 1.30 is added to read as follows, and all following sections of Article I (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“1.30 Retirement Savings Plan. The PMA Capital Corporation Retirement Savings Plan (formerly known as the PMA Capital Corporation 401(k) Plan) as in effect on January 1, 2006 and as such plan may be further amended and/or restated from time to time and each successor or replacement tax-qualified retirement plan.”
 
 
 
3

 
 
14.  A new Section 1.36 is added to read as follows:
 
“1.36 Valuation Date. Each day on which the NYSE is open for business and such other dates(s), if any, as the Administrator shall determine.”
 
15.  Section 2.1 is amended to read as follows:
 
“2.1 Past Service Credit.
 
(a) A Participant’s Past Service Credit under the Plan on and after January 1, 1999, and under the PMA SERP before January 1, 1999, shall be determined as follows. A Participant who is or was an Eligible Executive shall be credited with one additional year of Benefit Service (as such term is defined in Article I of the Pension Plan) under this Plan on and after January 1, 1999, and under the PMA SERP before January 1, 1999, for each year of Benefit Service credited under the Pension Plan through December 31, 2005 until the sum of the Participant’s years of Benefit Service credited under this Plan on and after January 1, 1999, and under the PMA SERP before January 1, 1999 (i.e. the Participant’s Past Service Credit under the Plan on and after January 1, 1999 and under the PMA SERP before January 1, 1999) and the Participant’s years of Benefit Service credited under the Pension Plan through December 31, 2005 equals twenty-five (25). A Participant’s Past Service Credit shall not increase after December 31, 2005.
 
(b) If:
 
(1) before January 1, 2006, the sum of a Participant’s Past Service Credit under the Plan on and after January 1, 1999, the PMA SERP before January 1, 1999, and such Participant’s years of Benefit Service under the Pension Plan is greater than twenty-five (25); or
 
(2) after December 31, 2005, the sum of a Participant’s Past Service Credit under the Plan on and after January 1, 1999 through December 31, 2005 and the PMA SERP before January 1, 1999, the Participant’s years of Benefit Service under the Pension Plan through December 31, 2005, and two times the Participant’s Years of Service after December 31, 2005 under the Retirement Savings Plan is greater than twenty-five (25);
 
such Participant’s Past Service Credit under the Plan and under the PMA SERP shall be reduced so that such sum does not exceed twenty-five (25). For each succeeding year in which the Participant earns a Year of Service under the Retirement Savings Plan, his Past Service Credit shall be reduced by one year (but not below zero). Any such reduction shall be made first under the PMA SERP and then under this Plan. Once a Participant’s Past Service Credit is reduced to zero under this Section 2.1,
 
 
 
 
4

 
 
his Contribution Subaccounts shall begin to be converted into Expired Contribution Subaccounts as he accumulates additional Years of Service under the Retirement Savings Plan, as described in Section 1.15 (definition of Expired Contribution Subaccount).
 
(c) Example. Assume that, as of December 31, 2005, a Participant has 10 years of Past Service Credit (including such credit under this Plan and the PMA SERP) and 10 years of Benefit Service under the Pension Plan. In 2006, the Participant begins to accumulate Contribution Credits which are allocated to his Contribution Subaccounts for each year. In 2008, the sum of his Past Service Credit (10 years), his Benefit Service under the Pension Plan (10 years) and two times his Years of Service under the Retirement Savings Plan (2 x 3 years = 6 years) exceeds the 25-year limit. At that point, he will no longer receive Contribution Credits and his Past Service Credit will begin to be reduced (starting with his Past Service Credit under the PMA SERP). If he continues to earn Years of Service under the Retirement Savings Plan, his Past Service Credit will be reduced to zero by 2018. At that point, two times his Years of Service under the Retirement Savings Plan (2 x 13 years = 26 years) will exceed the 25-year limit and his oldest Contribution Subaccount (from 2006) will be converted into an Expired Contribution Subaccount. If he continues to earn Years of Service under the Retirement Savings Plan, his last Contribution Subaccount will be converted into an Expired Contribution Subaccount in 2020, and he will cease to be entitled to any benefit under this Plan.”
 
16.  Section 2.2 is amended to read as follows:
 
“2.2 Past Service Retirement Benefit. Subject to Sections 2.3 and 8.2 hereof, a Participant’s Past Service Retirement Benefit, if any, shall be an amount equal to the amount that would be payable under the benefit formula actually used in determining such Participant’s benefit under Article V of the Pension Plan at the time such benefit becomes payable but using only the Participant’s Past Service Credit determined under Section 2.1 as his/her Years of Benefit Service (as defined in Article I of the Pension Plan) under the Pension Plan and the following additional assumptions:
 
(a) The Participant shall be deemed to receive Compensation (as such term is defined in Article I of the Pension Plan) during each year of past service equal to such Participant’s annual rate of pay as in effect on the Participant’s Employment Commencement Date (as such term is defined in Article I of the Pension Plan) without taking into account the Section 401(a)(17) Limitation or any salary reduction contributions by such Participant to the PMA Capital Corporation Excess Retirement Savings Plan or to the PMA Capital Corporation Executive Deferred Compensation Plan; and
 
 
 
 
5

 
 
(b) The Section 415 Limitation contained in Article XI of the Pension Plan shall not be taken into account.”
 
17.  Section 2.3 is amended to read as follows:
 
“2.3 Reemployment. If a Participant whose employment with a Participating Company was terminated at a time when such Participant had a Past Service Retirement Benefit and whose benefit had commenced to be paid under this Plan or under the PMA SERP becomes reemployed by the Participating Company, payment of such Past Service Retirement Benefit shall be suspended until such individual again ceases to be employed by the Participating Company. Thereupon, payment of such Past Service Retirement Benefit shall recommence.”
 
18.  A new Article III is added to read as follows, and all following Articles and Sections (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary:
 
“ARTICLE III - POST-2005 RETIREMENT SERVICE BENEFITS
 
3.1 Contribution Credits. With respect to each calendar quarter in each Plan Year beginning on or after January 1, 2006, the Plan Sponsor shall credit the Contribution Account of each Participant described in Section (a) hereof with a Contribution Credit in the amount described in Section (b) hereof.
 
(a) Eligibility. A Participant shall have a Contribution Credit credited on his or her behalf for any calendar quarter if he or she:
 
(i) had been credited with at least one Year of Eligibility Service (as defined in the Pension Plan) as of the day before the beginning of the calendar quarter;
 
(ii) was a Participant at any time during such calendar quarter; and
 
(iii) was an Eligible Executive of a Participating Company as of the last day of the calendar quarter; provided however, that this requirement shall be deemed to be satisfied if the Participant had retired from the Participating Company during the calendar quarter after having satisfied the requirements for a normal, early or late retirement under the terms of the Pension Plan.
 
Notwithstanding the foregoing, no further Contribution Credits shall be credited on behalf of a Participant where the sum of (x) the Participant’s years of Past Service Credit as determined under Section 2.1, plus (y) the Participant’s years of Benefit Service credited under the Pension Plan, plus two (2) times the Participant’s Years of Service credited after
 
 
 
6

 
 
 
December 31, 2005 under the Retirement Savings Plan, exceeds twenty-five (25).
 
(b) Amount. For any Participant described in Subsection (a) hereof, the Contribution Credit with respect to any calendar quarter shall equal:
 
(i) for any Participant who is not a Grandfathered Participant, one fourth (1/4) of a percentage of his or her Compensation to be determined under the following table, based on the Participant’s attained age as of the last day of the Plan Year in which the calendar quarter occurs:
 
Participant’s Age
Percentage of Compensation
 
Less than 30
2%
 
At least 30 but less than 45
 
3%
 
At least 45 but less than 55
 
4%
 
55 or older
 
5%
 
 
(ii) for any Grandfathered Participant, a percentage of one fourth (1/4) of his or her Compensation, to be determined under the following table, based on the Participant’s attained age as of the last day of the Plan Year in which the calendar quarter occurs:
 
Participant’s Age
 
Percentage of Compensation
 
At least 50 but less than 55
 
6%
 
At least 55 but less than 60
 
8%
 
60 or older
 
10%
 
 
3.2 Establishment of Plan Accounts. The Plan Sponsor shall establish and maintain on its books and records, solely as a bookkeeping entry, a Contribution Account for each Participant. Within such Contribution Account, the Plan Sponsor shall maintain an individual Contribution Subaccount with respect to each Plan Year for which Contribution Credits are credited on behalf of a Participant. Each Contribution Subaccount will be used to record:
 
(a) The Contribution Credits credited under this Plan on behalf of the Participant pursuant to Section 3.1 for the Plan Year for which the Contribution Subaccount was established;
 
 
 
7

 
 
(b) The related credits or debits for investment earnings or losses under Section 3.3; and
 
(c) The payments of benefits to the Participant or the Participant’s Spouse under Articles V or VI from such Subaccount.
 
3.3 Allocation among Investment Options. A Participant may direct that the Contribution Credits credited to his or her Contribution Account be valued, in accordance with Section 3.5 as if the balance credited to the Contribution Account were invested in one or more Vanguard Funds or other investments selected by the Participant. The Participant may select any of the investment options set forth in Appendix A in multiples of 5% (or such smaller percentage as the Administrator may determine). The designation of one or more investment options, whether a Vanguard Fund or otherwise, by a Participant under this Section 3.3 shall be used solely to measure the amounts of investment earnings or losses that will be credited or debited to each of the Participant’s Contribution Subaccounts on the Plan Sponsor’s books and records, and the Plan Sponsor shall not be required under the Plan to establish any account in the Vanguard Funds or to purchase any Vanguard Fund shares or other investment on the Participant’s behalf. The designation by a Participant of any investment option under this Section 3.3 shall be made in accordance with the rules and procedures prescribed by the Administrator.
 
3.4 Administration of Investments. The investment gain or loss with respect to Contributions Credits credited to the Participant’s Contribution Account on behalf of such Participant shall continue to be determined in the manner selected by the Participant pursuant to Section 3.3 until a new designation is filed with the Administrator or its appointee. If any Participant fails to file a designation, he or she shall be deemed to have elected to continue to follow the investment designation, if any, in effect for the immediately preceding Plan Year. A designation filed by a Participant changing his or her investment option selection shall apply to either future contributions, amounts already accumulated in his or her Contribution Account, or both. A Participant may change his or her investment selection on any Valuation Date and such change shall be effected as soon as administratively practicable.
 
3.5 Valuation of Contribution Accounts. The Contribution Account of each Participant shall be valued on each Valuation Date based upon the performance of the investment option or options selected by the Participant. Such valuation shall reflect the net asset value expressed per share of each designated investment option. Each Contribution Account shall be valued separately. A valuation summary shall be prepared on each Determination Date and/or such other dates as may be determined by the Administrator.
 
 
 
 
8

 
 
3.6 Calculation of Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit. As of any date of determination, the value of a Participant’s Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit, when expressed as a lump sum value, shall equal the sum of the balances in each of his or her Contribution Subaccounts, other than Expired Contribution Subaccounts. Solely with respect to a Participant whose Past Service Credit under the Plan has been reduced to zero in accordance with Section 2.1, the oldest Contribution Subaccount of any Participant for any Plan Year for which Contribution Credits were credited on his or her behalf shall become an Expired Contribution Subaccount on the date as of which two times the Participant’s Years of Service credited after December 31, 2005 under the Retirement Savings Plan, exceeds twenty-five (25). Upon his or her completion of each subsequent Year of Service under the Retirement Savings Plan, the Participant’s next oldest Contribution Subaccount shall become an additional Expired Contribution Subaccount. Upon becoming an Expired Contribution Subaccount, any Contribution Subaccount shall be permanently forfeited by the Participant. An example of the conversion of Contribution Subaccounts to Expired Contribution Subaccounts set forth in Section 2.1(c).
 
3.7 Reemployment. If a Participant whose employment with a Participating Company was terminated at a time when such Participant had a Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit and whose benefit had commenced to be paid under this Plan or under the PMA SERP becomes reemployed by the Participating Company, payment of such Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit shall be suspended until such individual again ceases to be employed by the Participating Company. Thereupon, payment of such Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit shall recommence.”
 
19.  Article IV (renumbered from Article III) is renamed as “VESTING OF RETIREMENT BENEFITS.”
 
20.  Section 4.1 (renumbered from 3.1) is amended to read as follows:
 
“4.1 Full Vesting. Except as otherwise provided in this Section 4.1 and in Section 8.2 hereof, a Participant shall have a fully (100%) vested and nonforfeitable interest in his/her Retirement Benefit, if any, once he/she has satisfied the age and service requirements for early or normal retirement under the Pension Plan, as amended effective June 1, 1999, whichever occurs first. Notwithstanding the foregoing:
 
(a) a Participant shall forfeit his/her vested interest, if any, in his/her Retirement Benefit if his/her employment is terminated for Cause; and
 
(b) a Participant shall have no vested interest in any Expired Contribution Subaccount.”
 
 
 
9

 
 
21.  Article V (renumbered from Article IV) is renamed as “FORM OF PAYMENT OF RETIREMENT BENEFITS.”
 
22.  Section 5.1 (renumbered from 4.1) is amended to read as follows:
 
“5.1 Payment of Retirement Benefit. Except as otherwise provided in Sections 5.3 and 8.2 hereof, a Participant’s vested Retirement Benefit, if any, shall commence to be paid at the time retirement income payments commence being made to the Participant under the Pension Plan. If a Participant elects early retirement under the Pension Plan then the Participant’s Retirement Benefit shall commence at the same time as payments from the Pension Plan and shall be reduced by the same early retirement reduction factors, if any, applicable to his/her retirement income from the Pension Plan, as amended effective June 1, 1999.”
 
23.  Section 5.2 (renumbered from 4.2) is amended to read as follows:
 
“5.2 Form of Payment. The normal form of payment of a Participant’s Retirement Benefit shall be the same as that provided under the Pension Plan. Subject to Section 5.5 hereof, a Participant’s Retirement Benefit shall be paid, however, in the same form which the Participant has elected, or is deemed to have elected, pursuant to the Pension Plan. The Participant’s election under the Pension Plan (with the valid consent of his/her Spouse where required under the Pension Plan) shall also be applicable to the payment of his/her Retirement Benefit. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any Participant who elects a Social Security level income option to augment his/her benefit under the Pension Plan, on account of his/her retirement before he/she is eligible for retirement benefits under the Federal Social Security system (as such optional form is described in Section 7.2 of the Pension Plan) shall receive his/her Retirement Benefit in the form of a single life annuity, as reduced, if necessary, in the manner set forth in Section 5.1 hereof. The Administrator shall have the sole and absolute discretion and authority to approve or reject a Participant’s request for a different method of payment than specified herein.”
 
24.  Section 5.3 (renumbered from 4.3) is amended to read as follows:
 
“5.3 Change of Control during Employment. Upon a Change of Control, or within two years thereafter, regardless of whether or not the Plan has been terminated during such period, if the Participating Company (or any successor corporation) shall terminate the Participant’s employment for other than Cause or if the Participant shall terminate employment for Good Reason or retirement, death, or Total Disability, then the Participant shall become eligible for, and entitled to receive, the Participant’s Retirement Benefit. The Participant’s Retirement Benefit under this provision shall be paid out in a lump sum upon such termination of employment. Such benefit shall be paid by the Participating Company
 
 
 
10

 
 
(or any successor corporation) to the Participant in a lump sum, in cash, within ninety days following the date of termination. Such amount will be calculated as the sum of (a) the Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant’s Past Service Retirement Benefit using the assumptions for determining Actuarial Equivalence provided under the Pension Plan for determining lump sum distributions, plus (b) the balance of his Contribution Account. Any Participant who remains employed by the Participating Company (or any successor corporation) for two or more years after a Change of Control shall receive the Retirement Benefit in accordance with Sections 5.1 and 5.2 hereof.”
 
25.  Section 5.4 (renumbered from 4.4) is amended to read as follows:
 
“5.4 Change of Control during Retirement. In the event of a Change of Control of the Plan Sponsor, any Participant who has previously retired from the Participating Company and is receiving payment of the Participant’s Retirement Benefit shall receive, within ninety days following such Change of Control, a single payment in cash which is the Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant’s remaining benefit under this Plan using the assumptions for determining Actuarial Equivalence provided under the Pension Plan for determining lump sum distributions.”
 
26.  Section 5.5 (renumbered from 4.5) is amended to read as follows:
 
“5.5 Failure to Assume Plan upon Change of Control. In the event the Plan is not assumed by a successor upon a Change of Control of the Plan Sponsor, then all Participants shall become eligible for, and entitled to receive, their Retirement Benefit. Such Retirement Benefit shall be paid out in a lump sum upon such failure to assume the Plan. Such benefit shall be paid by the Participating Company (or any successor corporation) to the Participant in a lump sum, in cash, within ninety days following the date of the failure to assume the Plan. Such amount will be calculated as the sum of (a) the Actuarial Equivalent of the Participant’s Past Service Retirement Benefit, plus (b) the balance of his Contribution Account.”
 
27.  Section 5.6 (renumbered from 4.6) is amended to read as follows:
 
“5.6 Actuarial Equivalent. A Retirement Benefit which is payable in any form other than the normal form under the Pension Plan, i.e., a straight life annuity over the lifetime of the Participant, or which commences at any time prior to the Participant’s Normal Retirement Date, shall be the Actuarial Equivalent of the Retirement Benefit payable hereunder using the assumptions for determining Actuarial Equivalence provided under the Pension Plan for making a comparable determination.”
 
 
 
 
11

 
 
28.  Article VI (renumbered from V) is amended to read as follows:
 
ARTICLE VI - DEATH BENEFITS
 
6.1 Death Benefit - Past Service Retirement Benefit. Except as otherwise provided herein, a death benefit shall be payable to the surviving Spouse of a Participant who dies before commencement of his/her Past Service Retirement Benefit, if the Spouse is entitled to a qualified pre-retirement survivor annuity under Article VI of the Pension Plan. The amount of the death benefit hereunder shall be based on the amount of the Participant’s Past Service Retirement Benefit determined using the date of death as the date of retirement or separation from service and, for purposes of converting the Past Service Retirement Benefit to a spousal survivor death benefit, using the rules contained in Article VI of the Pension Plan. The death benefit under this Section 6.1 shall be administered and distributed in accordance with the provisions of Article VI of the Pension Plan.
 
In the event of a Change of Control of the Plan Sponsor, any surviving Spouse who is receiving payment of a death benefit pursuant to this Section 6.1 shall receive a single lump sum cash payment which is the Actuarial Equivalent of the surviving Spouse’s remaining death benefit. Such benefit shall be paid by the Participating Company (or any successor corporation) to the surviving Spouse within ninety days following the date of the Change of Control.
 
6.2 Death Benefit - Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit. The payment of death benefits with respect to a Participant’s Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit shall be governed by the following rules:
 
(a) Death After Commencement of Benefit Payments. If the Participant dies after commencing to receive his or her Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit, any death benefit with respect thereto shall be determined solely in accordance with the form of payment that the Participant had elected for his or her Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit.
 
(b) Death Prior to Commencement of Benefit Payments. If the Participant dies before commencing to receive his or her Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit, the then current balance of his or her Contribution Account shall be paid to his or her Beneficiary(ies) in a single sum payment as soon as administratively practicable following the Participant’s death.
 
6.3 Beneficiary Designations. Each Participant may designate, in a signed writing delivered to the Administrator in a form approved by the Administrator, one or more Beneficiaries to receive any distribution of a
 
 
 
12

 
 
Post-2005 Service Retirement Benefit which may become payable as the result of the Participant’s death.
 
(a) Changes and Failed Designations. A Participant may designate different Beneficiaries at any time by delivering a new designation. Any designation shall become effective only upon its receipt by the Administrator, and the last effective designation received by the Administrator shall supersede all prior designations. If a Participant dies without having designated a Beneficiary, or if no Beneficiary survives the Participant, the Participant’s Contribution Account shall be payable (i) to his or her surviving Spouse, (ii) if the Participant is not survived by a Spouse, to the Participant’s Beneficiary under his or her Participating Company’s basic group-term life insurance program (if any), or (iii) if neither (i) nor (ii) is applicable, to the executors and/or administrators of his or her estate.
 
(b) Divorced Participant. Notwithstanding the foregoing or any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, in the case of a divorced Participant who named his or her former Spouse as his or her Beneficiary prior to his or her divorce and who dies without changing such Beneficiary designation, such deceased Participant’s former Spouse shall be deemed to have predeceased the Participant. In that event, (i) the deceased Participant’s current surviving Spouse shall be deemed to replace his or her former Spouse as his or her Beneficiary in accordance with the terms of his or her Beneficiary designation form and the remainder of his or her Beneficiary designation form shall continue in effect in accordance with its terms, or (ii) if there is no current surviving Spouse, the deceased Participant’s Beneficiary shall be the deceased Participant’s surviving primary Beneficiary (ies) as designated on, and in accordance with the terms of, his or her Beneficiary designation form, or (iii) if there is no current surviving primary Beneficiary, the deceased Participant’s Beneficiary shall be the deceased Participant’s surviving secondary Beneficiary (ies) as designated on, and in accordance with the terms of, his Beneficiary designation form, or (iv) if there is no surviving secondary Beneficiary, the deceased Participant’s Beneficiary shall be the executor of the deceased Participant’s will or the administrator of his or her estate.
 
(c) Documentary Proof. The Administrator may require the execution and delivery of any documents, papers, and receipts that the Administrator deems reasonably necessary in order to be assured that the payment of any death benefit is made to the person or persons entitled to payment.
 
6.4 Payments to Incompetents. If any individual to whom a benefit is payable under the Plan is a minor, or if the Administrator determines that any individual to whom a benefit is payable under the Plan is incompetent to receive such payment or to give a valid release therefor, payment shall be made to the guardian, committee or other representative of the estate of such individual which has been duly appointed by a court of competent jurisdiction. If no guardian, committee or other representative has been appointed, payment may be made to any person as custodian for such individual under any Uniform Transfer to Minors Act or may be made to or applied to or for the benefit of the minor or incompetent, the incompetent’s spouse, children or other dependents, the institution or persons maintaining the minor or incompetent, or any of them, in such proportions as the Administrator from time to time shall determine; and the release of the person or institution receiving the payment shall
 
 
 
13

 
 
be a valid and complete discharge of any liability of the Plan with respect to any benefit so paid.
 
6.5 Simultaneous Death. In the event of the simultaneous death of a Participant eligible for a death benefit under this Article VI and his/her Spouse or other Beneficiary so that it is not possible to determine which one was the survivor, it shall be presumed for purposes of this Article VI that the Spouse or other Beneficiary predeceased the Participant.”
 
29.  Section 8.2 (renumbered from 7.2) is amended to read as follows:
 
“8.2 Amendment or Termination.
 
(a) The Board of Directors reserves the right to alter, amend or terminate the Plan, or any part thereof, through the adoption of a written resolution; provided, however, that no such action by the Board of Directors shall reduce a Participant’s Retirement Benefit accrued as of the time thereof and no such amendment or termination may occur as a result of a Change of Control, within two years after a Change of Control, or as part of any plan to effect a Change of Control. Each amendment shall be set forth in a written instrument.
 
(b) If the Plan is terminated, a determination shall be made of each Participant’s Retirement Benefit as of the Plan termination date. The amount of a Participant’s benefit or benefits shall be payable to the Participant at the time it would have been payable under Article V hereof if the Plan had not been terminated. If a Participant dies after termination of the Plan, but prior to his/her Termination of Employment, his/her surviving Spouse shall receive a distribution of his/her death benefit, determined in accordance with Article VI hereof, but based on the Participant’s Retirement Benefit as of the Plan termination date.”
 
 
 
14

 
 
30.  An “Appendix B” is added to the Plan to read as follows:
 
“APPENDIX B - INVESTMENT OPTIONS AVAILABLE FOR MEASUREMENT OF INVESTMENT EARNINGS OR LOSSES IN CONTRIBUTION ACCOUNTS UNDER PLAN
 
(a) Morgan Growth Fund
 
(b) Total Bond Market Index Fund
 
(c) 500 Index Fund
 
(d) Treasury Money Market Fund
 
(e) STAR Fund
 
(f) Windsor II Fund
 
(g) International Growth Fund
 
(h) Explorer Fund
 
(i) Extended Market Index Fund
 
(j) Total International Stock Index Fund
 
(k) Any other investment options selected by the Administrator”
 

 
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION has caused these presents to be duly executed, under seal, this 24th day of October, 2005.
 
Attest:
PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION
[SEAL]
 
   
/s/ Robert L. Pratter
/s/ William E. Hitselberger
   
Robert L. Pratter, Secretary
William E. Hitselberger, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
 

 
15

 
EX-10.4 6 ex10-4.htm EXHIBIT 10.4 Exhibit 10.4 Exhibit 10.4
SECOND AMENDMENT
TO THE
PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION PENSION PLAN
(As Amended and Restated Effective January 1, 1999)
 
 
WHEREAS, PMA Capital Corporation (the “Company”) maintains the PMA Capital Corporation Pension Plan (the “Plan”) for the benefit of certain of its eligible employees, and the eligible employees of certain participating affiliates; and
 
WHEREAS, the Plan was most recently amended and restated effective January 1, 1999 and has since been modified by the First Amendment thereto effective January 1, 2003; and
 
WHEREAS, the Company wishes to amend the Plan to (i) close the Plan to new participants, and (ii) freeze all benefit accruals thereunder, with both changes to be effective December 31, 2005; and
 
WHEREAS, in conjunction with such amendment to the Plan, the Company has determined that the PMA Capital Corporation Retirement Savings Plan (the “Retirement Savings Plan”) and the PMA Capital Corporation Retirement Savings Excess Plan (the “Retirement Savings Excess Plan”) shall be amended to provide that, in lieu of future benefit accruals under the Plan, eligible employees shall be entitled to receive non-matching, age-based employer contributions under the Retirement Savings Plan and, if eligible, additional retirement credits under the Retirement Savings Excess Plan; and
 
WHEREAS, under Sections 9.1 and 15.4 of the Plan, the Company has reserved the right to amend the Plan with respect to all Participating Companies at any time, subject to certain inapplicable limitations;
 
NOW, THEREFORE, effective December 31, 2005 (or such other dates as may be expressly provided herein), the Company hereby amends the Plan as follows:
 
1. Effective January 1, 2006, Sections 1.55, 1.56 and 1.57 are renumbered as 1.95, 1.96 and 1.97 respectively, and amended to read as follows:
 
“1.95 Trust shall mean the trust established and maintained pursuant to this Plan for the purpose of providing benefits hereunder.
 
1.96 Trust Agreement shall mean the document executed by the Trustee and the Plan Sponsor fixing the rights, duties and liabilities of each with respect to holding and administering the Trust. The terms of the Trust Agreement shall be deemed incorporated herein as part of this Plan.
 
1.97 Trustee shall mean any individual(s) or corporate Fiduciary appointed by the Board by its President or any duly appointed successors, functioning in that capacity in accordance with the Trust Agreement.”
 

All Section numbers from 1.58 through the end of Article I (and all applicable cross-references) are renumbered as necessary.
 
2. Section 7.4 is amended effective March 28, 2005 to read as follows:
 
7.4 Cash-Out. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.6(b)(i) with respect to assets to be transferred from this Plan to the PMA Foundation Pension Plan, if at the time of a Participant’s retirement or Separation from Service, the Present Value of his or her vested Accrued Benefit does not exceed $1,000, and if such Participant is entitled to an immediate or deferred Benefit hereunder, the Administrator shall direct that the Participant be paid the Present Value of such Accrued Benefit in a lump sum without his or her consent provided that such payment shall be made no later than the close of the second Plan Year following the Plan Year in which his or her retirement or Separation from Service occurred. If the Present Value of a Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit is zero, the Participant shall be deemed to have received a distribution of such vested Accrued Benefit.
 
(a) Resumption of Employment. If following such distribution the Participant resumes employment covered under this Plan, then except as otherwise provided in Section 7.4(b), below, the Participant shall not have any right to have his or her prior years of Benefit and Vesting Service attributable to that distribution reinstated.
 
(b) Restoration. If a Participant receives a distribution pursuant to this Section 7.4 before the close of the second Plan Year following the Plan Year in which his or her retirement or Separation from Service occurred and the Participant resumes covered employment under the Plan, he or she shall have the right to restore his or her Accrued Benefit (including all optional forms of Benefit and subsidies relating to such Benefit) to the extent forfeited upon the repayment to the Plan of the full amount of the distribution plus interest, compounded annually from the date of distribution at the rate of interest determined for purposes of Code Section 411(c)(2)(C). Such repayment must be made before the earlier of (i) five years after the first date on which the Participant is subsequently reemployed by the Employer or (ii) the date the Participant incurs five consecutive One-Year Service Breaks or a Break in Service of five consecutive years (as applicable) following the date of distribution. If a Participant is deemed to receive a distribution pursuant to this Section 7.4, and the Participant resumes employment covered under this Plan before the date the Participant incurs five consecutive One-Year Service Breaks or a Break in Service of five consecutive years (as applicable), upon the reemployment of such Participant, the Employer-provided Accrued Benefit will be restored to the amount of such Accrued Benefit on the date of the deemed distribution. Notwithstanding the foregoing, if, prior to January 1, 2002, a Participant receives a distribution under Section 7.4 later than the close of the second Plan Year following the Plan Year in which his or her retirement or Separation from Service occurred and later resumes covered employment under the Plan, no repayment of the amount of his or her distribution shall be permitted and his or her Benefit and Vesting Service earned prior to such retirement or Separation from Service shall not be disregarded in any subsequent determination of his or her Accrued Benefit under the Plan, but his or her Accrued Benefit shall be offset by an amount which is the Present Value of the distribution received.
 
2

(c) Spousal Consent. Following a Participant’s Benefit commencement date, a partial or total cash-out of the Present Value of the Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity or the preretirement survivor annuity shall not be made even if such value, as determined in the same manner as prescribed above, does not exceed $1,000 unless the cash-out is consented to in writing by the Participant and the Participant’s Spouse, if any, or where the Participant has died, by the surviving Spouse.”
 
3. Section 7.6 is amended effective March 28, 2005 to read as follows:
 
7.6 Consent to Distributions. If the Present Value of a Participant’s vested Accrued Benefit exceeds $1,000, or there are remaining payments to be made with respect to a particular distribution option that previously commenced, and the Accrued Benefit is immediately distributable, the Participant and the Participant’s Spouse (or where either the Participant or the Spouse has died, the survivor) must consent to any distribution of such Accrued Benefit in other than the normal form of Benefit. The consent of the Participant and the Participant’s Spouse shall be obtained in writing within the 90-day period ending on the Annuity Starting Date. The Employer shall notify the Participant and the Participant’s Spouse of the right to defer any distribution until the Participant’s Accrued Benefit is no longer immediately distributable. Such notification shall include a general description of the material features, and an explanation of relative values, of the optional forms of Benefit available under the Plan in a manner that would satisfy the notice requirements of Section 417(a)(3) of the Code, and shall be provided no less than 30 days and no more than 90 days prior to the Annuity Starting Date. Notwithstanding the foregoing, only the Participant need consent to the commencement of a distribution in the form of a Qualified Joint and Survivor Annuity while the Accrued Benefit is immediately distributable. Neither the consent of the Participant nor the Participant’s Spouse shall be required to the extent that a distribution is required to satisfy Section 401(a)(9) or 415 of the Code.
 
(a) For purposes of this Section 7.6, Present Value shall be determined in accordance with Section 7.5 hereof.
 
(b) An Accrued Benefit is immediately distributable if any part of the Accrued Benefit could be distributed to the Participant (or surviving Spouse) before the Participant attains (or would have attained if not deceased) the later of Normal Retirement Age or age 62.”
 
3

4. Section 9.1(c) of the Plan is deleted in its entirety effective October 1, 2005, and Subsection 9.1(d) is renumbered as 9.1(c).
 
5. A new Article XVI is added to the Plan to read as follows:
 
ARTICLE XVI - FREEZING OF THE PLAN
 
16.1 Freezing of the Plan. The Plan shall be frozen effective December 31, 2005 (the “Freeze Date”). Pursuant to the freezing of the Plan:
 
(a) No Eligible Employee shall become a Participant nor resume active participation in the Plan after the Freeze Date;
 
(b) Each Participant’s Accrued Benefit shall be deemed to be frozen as of the Freeze Date, and the amount of such Accrued Benefit shall be unaffected by any Service performed or Compensation paid after the Freeze Date, or in any changes in Covered Compensation after the Freeze Date; and
 
(c) Following the Freeze Date, each Participant shall continue to be credited with Vesting Service in accordance with Article II of the Plan.
 
Any provision of the Plan that would otherwise provide for either (1) the commencement or resumption of Plan participation, or (2) the continuing accrual of benefits, after the Freeze Date (including, without limitation, Sections 1.1, 1.17, 1.18, 1.67, 1.100, 1.101, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5, 3.2, 3.3, 5.1, and 5.3) is hereby superseded to the extent that it would so provide.”
 
 
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION has caused these presents to be duly executed, under seal, this 24th day of October, 2005.
 
 
Attest:
PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION
[SEAL]
 
   
/s/ Robert L. Pratter
/s/ William E. Hitselberger                          
Robert L. Pratter, Secretary
William E. Hitselberger, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
 
4


EX-10.5 7 ex10-5.htm EXHIBIT 10.5 Exhibit 10.5 Exhibit 10.5
SECOND AMENDMENT
TO THE
PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION
SUPPLEMENTAL EXECUTIVE RETIREMENT PLAN
(As Amended and Restated Effective January 1, 2000)
 

 
WHEREAS, PMA Capital Corporation (the “Company”) maintains the PMA Capital Corporation Supplemental Executive Retirement Plan (the “Plan”) to provide supplemental executive retirement benefits to a select group of management and highly compensated employees of the Company and certain participating affiliates; and
 
WHEREAS, the Plan was most recently amended and restated effective January 1, 2000 and has since been modified by the First Amendment thereto effective January 1, 2003; and
 
WHEREAS, the Company has determined that the PMA Capital Corporation Pension Plan (the “Pension Plan”) shall be amended to freeze benefit accrual thereunder effective December 31, 2005, and that, in lieu of future benefit accruals under the Pension Plan, eligible employees shall be entitled to receive non-matching, age-based employer contributions under the PMA Capital Corporation Retirement Savings Plan, and, if eligible, additional retirement credits under the PMA Capital Corporation Retirement Savings Excess Plan; and
 
WHEREAS, the Company now desires to amend the Plan so as to similarly freeze benefit accrual under the Plan;
 
NOW, THEREFORE, effective December 31, 2005, the Company hereby amends the Plan as follows:
 
1. A new Article IX is added to the Plan to read as follows:
 
ARTICLE IX - FREEZING OF THE PLAN
 
9.1 Freezing of the Plan. The Plan shall be frozen effective December 31, 2005 (the “Freeze Date”). Pursuant to the freezing of the Plan:
 
(a) No Eligible Officer shall become a Participant nor resume active participation in the Plan after the Freeze Date;
 
(b) Each Participant’s Excess Retirement Benefit shall be deemed to be frozen as of the Freeze Date, and the amount of such Excess Retirement Benefit shall be unaffected by any service that the Participant may perform for, or any compensation that he or she may receive from, a Participating Company after the Freeze Date; and
 

(c) Following the Freeze Date, each Participant’s vested right to his or her Excess Retirement Benefit shall continue to be determined in accordance with Section 3.1 of the Plan.
 
Any provision of the Plan that would otherwise provide for either (1) the commencement or resumption of Plan participation, or (2) the continuing accrual of benefits, after the Freeze Date (including, without limitation, Sections 2.1, 2.2 and 5.1) is hereby superseded to the extent that it would so provide.”
 

 
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION has caused these presents to be duly executed, under seal, this 24th day of October, 2005.
 
 
 
Attest:
PMA CAPITAL CORPORATION
[SEAL]
 
   
/s/ Robert L. Pratter
/s/ William E. Hitselberger
Robert L. Pratter, Secretary
William E. Hitselberger, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer
 

2

EX-12 8 ex12.htm EXHIBIT 12 Exhibit 12
EXHIBIT 12
COMPUTATION OF RATIO OF EARNINGS TO FIXED CHARGES
(Dollar amounts in thousands)

 

   
For the nine months ended   
 
   
September 30,   
 
 
 
2005
 
 2004
 
            
EARNINGS
          
Pre-tax income (loss)
 
$
(24,914
)
$
18,923
 
Fixed charges
   
13,101
   
9,923
 
Total
 
$
(11,813
)
$
28,846
 
               
FIXED CHARGES
             
Interest expense and amortization of debt discount
             
and premium on all indebtedness
 
$
12,114
 
$
8,872
 
Interest portion of rental expenses
   
987
   
1,051
 
Total fixed charges
 
$
13,101
 
$
9,923
 
               
               
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges
   
(a
)
 
2.9 x
 
               
               
(a) Earnings were insufficient to cover fixed charges by $24.9 million for the nine months
             
ended September 30, 2005.
             
               
               



 
 



EX-31.1 9 ex31-1.htm EXHIBIT 31.1 Exhibit 31.1

EXHIBIT 31.1

 
Certification Pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002

I, Vincent T. Donnelly, certify that:

 
1.
I have reviewed this quarterly report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2005 of PMA Capital Corporation;

 
2.
Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 
3.
Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 
4.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 
a)
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 
b)
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 
c)
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 
d)
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 
5.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent function):

 
a)
All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 
b)
Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.



Dated: November 8, 2005
/s/ Vincent T. Donnelly
 
Vincent T. Donnelly
 
President and Chief Executive Officer


 
EX-31.2 10 ex31-2.htm EXHIBIT 31.2 Exhibit 31.2
EXHIBIT 31.2

 
Certification Pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002

I, William E. Hitselberger, certify that:

 
1.
I have reviewed this quarterly report on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2005 of PMA Capital Corporation;

 
2.
Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 
3.
Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the registrant as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 
4.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the registrant and have:

 
a)
Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the registrant, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 
b)
Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 
c)
Evaluated the effectiveness of the registrant’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 
d)
Disclosed in this report any change in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the registrant’s most recent fiscal quarter (the registrant’s fourth fiscal quarter in the case of an annual report) that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 
5.
The registrant’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the registrant’s auditors and the audit committee of the registrant’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent function):

 
a)
All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the registrant’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 
b)
Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the registrant’s internal control over financial reporting.


Dated: November 8, 2005
/s/ William E. Hitselberger
 
William E. Hitselberger
 
Executive Vice President and
 
Chief Financial Officer


 
EX-32.1 11 ex32-1.htm EXHIBIT 32.1 Exhibit 32.1
 
EXHIBIT 32.1

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO
18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,
AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO
SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002


I, Vincent T. Donnelly, President and Chief Executive Officer of PMA Capital Corporation, do hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, that, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. § 1350, as adopted pursuant to § 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the information contained in the Quarterly Report of PMA Capital Corporation on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2005, filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and the information contained in such report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of PMA Capital Corporation. A signed original of this written statement required by Section 906 has been provided to the Company and will be retained by the Company and furnished to the Securities and Exchange Commission or its staff upon request.


 
/s/ Vincent T. Donnelly
 
Vincent T. Donnelly
 
President and Chief Executive Officer
 
November 8, 2005
   


 
EX-32.2 12 ex32-2.htm EXHIBIT 32.2 Exhibit 32.2
 
EXHIBIT 32.2

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO
18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,
AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO
SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002


I, William E. Hitselberger, Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of PMA Capital Corporation, do hereby certify, to the best of my knowledge, that, pursuant to 18 U.S.C. § 1350, as adopted pursuant to § 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, the information contained in the Quarterly Report of PMA Capital Corporation on Form 10-Q for the quarter ended September 30, 2005, filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and the information contained in such report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of PMA Capital Corporation. A signed original of this written statement required by Section 906 has been provided to the Company and will be retained by the Company and furnished to the Securities and Exchange Commission or its staff upon request.



 
/s/ William E. Hitselberger
 
William E. Hitselberger
 
Executive Vice President and
 
Chief Financial Officer
 
November 8, 2005
 

 


 

-----END PRIVACY-ENHANCED MESSAGE-----